leandrof/linux
1
0
Fork 0
forked from Minki/linux
Code Issues Pull Requests Packages Projects Releases Wiki Activity

Merge master.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux-2.6

Browse Source 
Conflicts:

	drivers/usb/input/Makefile
	drivers/usb/input/gtco.c
This commit is contained in:
Dmitry Torokhov 2007-05-01 00:24:54 -04:00
commit bc95f3669f
4726 changed files with 258299 additions and 174117 deletions
Show Stats Download Patch File Download Diff File Expand all files Collapse all files

2
.mailmap
View File

@ -67,6 +67,8 @@ Koushik <raghavendra.koushik@neterion.com>
Leonid I Ananiev <leonid.i.ananiev@intel.com>
Linas Vepstas <linas@austin.ibm.com>
Matthieu CASTET <castet.matthieu@free.fr>
Michael Buesch <mb@bu3sch.de>
Michael Buesch <mbuesch@freenet.de>
Michel Dänzer <michel@tungstengraphics.com>
Mitesh shah <mshah@teja.com>
Morten Welinder <terra@gnome.org>

24
CREDITS
View File

@ -317,6 +317,12 @@ S: 2322 37th Ave SW
S: Seattle, Washington 98126-2010
S: USA
N: Johannes Berg
E: johannes@sipsolutions.net
W: http://johannes.sipsolutions.net/
P: 1024D/9AB78CA5 AD02 0176 4E29 C137 1DF6 08D2 FC44 CF86 9AB7 8CA5
D: powerpc & 802.11 hacker
N: Stephen R. van den Berg (AKA BuGless)
E: berg@pool.informatik.rwth-aachen.de
D: General kernel, gcc, and libc hacker
@ -2286,14 +2292,14 @@ S: D-90453 Nuernberg
S: Germany
N: Arnaldo Carvalho de Melo
E: acme@mandriva.com
E: acme@ghostprotocols.net
E: arnaldo.melo@gmail.com
E: acme@redhat.com
W: http://oops.ghostprotocols.net:81/blog/
P: 1024D/9224DF01 D5DF E3BB E3C8 BCBB F8AD 841A B6AB 4681 9224 DF01
D: IPX, LLC, DCCP, cyc2x, wl3501_cs, net/ hacks
S: Mandriva
S: R. Tocantins, 89 - Cristo Rei
S: 80050-430 - Curitiba - Paraná
S: R. Brasílio Itiberê, 4270/1010 - Água Verde
S: 80240-060 - Curitiba - Paraná
S: Brazil
N: Karsten Merker
@ -2678,7 +2684,7 @@ S: Ottawa, Ontario
S: Canada K2P 0X8
N: Mikael Pettersson
E: mikpe@csd.uu.se
E: mikpe@it.uu.se
W: http://www.csd.uu.se/~mikpe/
D: Miscellaneous fixes
@ -3295,6 +3301,14 @@ S: 12725 SW Millikan Way, Suite 400
S: Beaverton, Oregon 97005
S: USA
N: Li Yang
E: leoli@freescale.com
D: Freescale Highspeed USB device driver
D: Freescale QE SoC support and Ethernet driver
S: B-1206 Jingmao Guojigongyu
S: 16 Baliqiao Nanjie, Beijing 101100
S: People's Repulic of China
N: Marcelo Tosatti
E: marcelo@kvack.org
D: v2.4 kernel maintainer

9
Documentation/ABI/obsolete/dv1394 Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
What: dv1394 (a.k.a. "OHCI-DV I/O support" for FireWire)
Contact: linux1394-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
Description:
New application development should use raw1394 + userspace libraries
instead, notably libiec61883 which is functionally equivalent.
Users:
ffmpeg/libavformat (used by a variety of media players)
dvgrab v1.x (replaced by dvgrab2 on top of raw1394 and resp. libraries)

41
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/autosuspend
Date: March 2007
KernelVersion: 2.6.21
Contact: Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
Description:
Each USB device directory will contain a file named
power/autosuspend. This file holds the time (in seconds)
the device must be idle before it will be autosuspended.
0 means the device will be autosuspended as soon as
possible. Negative values will prevent the device from
being autosuspended at all, and writing a negative value
will resume the device if it is already suspended.
The autosuspend delay for newly-created devices is set to
the value of the usbcore.autosuspend module parameter.
What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/level
Date: March 2007
KernelVersion: 2.6.21
Contact: Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
Description:
Each USB device directory will contain a file named
power/level. This file holds a power-level setting for
the device, one of "on", "auto", or "suspend".
"on" means that the device is not allowed to autosuspend,
although normal suspends for system sleep will still
be honored. "auto" means the device will autosuspend
and autoresume in the usual manner, according to the
capabilities of its driver. "suspend" means the device
is forced into a suspended state and it will not autoresume
in response to I/O requests. However remote-wakeup requests
from the device may still be enabled (the remote-wakeup
setting is controlled separately by the power/wakeup
attribute).
During normal use, devices should be left in the "auto"
level. The other levels are meant for administrative uses.
If you want to suspend a device immediately but leave it
free to wake up in response to I/O requests, you should
write "0" to power/autosuspend.

6
Documentation/DocBook/kernel-api.tmpl
View File

@ -236,6 +236,12 @@ X!Ilib/string.c
!Enet/core/dev.c
!Enet/ethernet/eth.c
!Iinclude/linux/etherdevice.h
!Edrivers/net/phy/phy.c
!Idrivers/net/phy/phy.c
!Edrivers/net/phy/phy_device.c
!Idrivers/net/phy/phy_device.c
!Edrivers/net/phy/mdio_bus.c
!Idrivers/net/phy/mdio_bus.c
<!-- FIXME: Removed for now since no structured comments in source
X!Enet/core/wireless.c
-->

4
Documentation/SubmitChecklist
View File

@ -76,3 +76,7 @@ kernel patches.
22: Newly-added code has been compiled with `gcc -W'. This will generate
lots of noise, but is good for finding bugs like "warning: comparison
between signed and unsigned".
23: Tested after it has been merged into the -mm patchset to make sure
that it still works with all of the other queued patches and various
changes in the VM, VFS, and other subsystems.

38
Documentation/acpi-hotkey.txt
View File

@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
driver/acpi/hotkey.c implement:
1. /proc/acpi/hotkey/event_config
(event based hotkey or event config interface):
a. add a event based hotkey(event) :
echo "0:bus::action:method:num:num" > event_config
b. delete a event based hotkey(event):
echo "1:::::num:num" > event_config
c. modify a event based hotkey(event):
echo "2:bus::action:method:num:num" > event_config
2. /proc/acpi/hotkey/poll_config
(polling based hotkey or event config interface):
a.add a polling based hotkey(event) :
echo "0:bus:method:action:method:num" > poll_config
this adding command will create a proc file
/proc/acpi/hotkey/method, which is used to get
result of polling.
b.delete a polling based hotkey(event):
echo "1:::::num" > event_config
c.modify a polling based hotkey(event):
echo "2:bus:method:action:method:num" > poll_config
3./proc/acpi/hotkey/action
(interface to call aml method associated with a
specific hotkey(event))
echo "event_num:event_type:event_argument" >
/proc/acpi/hotkey/action.
The result of the execution of this aml method is
attached to /proc/acpi/hotkey/poll_method, which is dynamically
created. Please use command "cat /proc/acpi/hotkey/polling_method"
to retrieve it.
Note: Use cmdline "acpi_generic_hotkey" to over-ride
platform-specific with generic driver.

46
Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/DMA.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
S3C2410 DMA
===========
Introduction
------------
The kernel provides an interface to manage DMA transfers
using the DMA channels in the cpu, so that the central
duty of managing channel mappings, and programming the
channel generators is in one place.
DMA Channel Ordering
--------------------
Many of the range do not have connections for the DMA
channels to all sources, which means that some devices
have a restricted number of channels that can be used.
To allow flexibilty for each cpu type and board, the
dma code can be given an dma ordering structure which
allows the order of channel search to be specified, as
well as allowing the prohibition of certain claims.
struct s3c24xx_dma_order has a list of channels, and
each channel within has a slot for a list of dma
channel numbers. The slots are searched in order, for
the presence of a dma channel number with DMA_CH_VALID
orred in.
If the order has the flag DMA_CH_NEVER set, then after
checking the channel list, the system will return no
found channel, thus denying the request.
A board support file can call s3c24xx_dma_order_set()
to register an complete ordering set. The routine will
copy the data, so the original can be discared with
__initdata.
Authour
-------
Ben Dooks,
Copyright (c) 2007 Ben Dooks, Simtec Electronics
Licensed under the GPL v2

21
Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt
View File

@ -8,13 +8,10 @@ Introduction
The Samsung S3C24XX range of ARM9 System-on-Chip CPUs are supported
by the 's3c2410' architecture of ARM Linux. Currently the S3C2410,
S3C2440 and S3C2442 devices are supported.
S3C2412, S3C2413, S3C2440 and S3C2442 devices are supported.
Support for the S3C2400 series is in progress.
Support for the S3C2412 and S3C2413 CPUs is being merged.
Configuration
-------------
@ -26,6 +23,22 @@ Configuration
please check the machine specific documentation.
Layout
------
The core support files are located in the platform code contained in
arch/arm/plat-s3c24xx with headers in include/asm-arm/plat-s3c24xx.
This directory should be kept to items shared between the platform
code (arch/arm/plat-s3c24xx) and the arch/arm/mach-s3c24* code.
Each cpu has a directory with the support files for it, and the
machines that carry the device. For example S3C2410 is contained
in arch/arm/mach-s3c2410 and S3C2440 in arch/arm/mach-s3c2440
Register, kernel and platform data definitions are held in the
include/asm-arm/arch-s3c2410 directory.
Machines
--------

35
Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt
View File

@ -5,10 +5,10 @@
Introduction
------------
The S3C2410 supports a low-power suspend mode, where the SDRAM is kept
The S3C24XX supports a low-power suspend mode, where the SDRAM is kept
in Self-Refresh mode, and all but the essential peripheral blocks are
powered down. For more information on how this works, please look
at the S3C2410 datasheets from Samsung.
at the relevant CPU datasheet from Samsung.
Requirements
@ -56,6 +56,27 @@ Machine Support
Note, the original method of adding an late_initcall() is wrong,
and will end up initialising all compiled machines' pm init!
The following is an example of code used for testing wakeup from
an falling edge on IRQ_EINT0:
static irqreturn_t button_irq(int irq, void *pw)
{
return IRQ_HANDLED;
}
statuc void __init machine_init(void)
{
...
request_irq(IRQ_EINT0, button_irq, IRQF_TRIGGER_FALLING,
"button-irq-eint0", NULL);
enable_irq_wake(IRQ_EINT0);
s3c2410_pm_init();
}
Debugging
---------
@ -70,6 +91,12 @@ Debugging
care should be taken that any external clock sources that the UARTs
rely on are still enabled at that point.
3) If any debugging is placed in the resume path, then it must have the
relevant clocks and peripherals setup before use (ie, bootloader).
For example, if you transmit a character from the UART, the baud
rate and uart controls must be setup beforehand.
Configuration
-------------
@ -89,6 +116,10 @@ Configuration
Allows the entire memory to be checksummed before and after the
suspend to see if there has been any corruption of the contents.
Note, the time to calculate the CRC is dependant on the CPU speed
and the size of memory. For an 64Mbyte RAM area on an 200MHz
S3C2410, this can take approximately 4 seconds to complete.
This support requires the CRC32 function to be enabled.

113
Documentation/cpu-load.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
CPU load
--------
Linux exports various bits of information via `/proc/stat' and
`/proc/uptime' that userland tools, such as top(1), use to calculate
the average time system spent in a particular state, for example:
$ iostat
Linux 2.6.18.3-exp (linmac) 02/20/2007
avg-cpu: %user %nice %system %iowait %steal %idle
10.01 0.00 2.92 5.44 0.00 81.63
...
Here the system thinks that over the default sampling period the
system spent 10.01% of the time doing work in user space, 2.92% in the
kernel, and was overall 81.63% of the time idle.
In most cases the `/proc/stat' information reflects the reality quite
closely, however due to the nature of how/when the kernel collects
this data sometimes it can not be trusted at all.
So how is this information collected? Whenever timer interrupt is
signalled the kernel looks what kind of task was running at this
moment and increments the counter that corresponds to this tasks
kind/state. The problem with this is that the system could have
switched between various states multiple times between two timer
interrupts yet the counter is incremented only for the last state.
Example
-------
If we imagine the system with one task that periodically burns cycles
in the following manner:
time line between two timer interrupts
|--------------------------------------|
^ ^
|_ something begins working |
|_ something goes to sleep
(only to be awaken quite soon)
In the above situation the system will be 0% loaded according to the
`/proc/stat' (since the timer interrupt will always happen when the
system is executing the idle handler), but in reality the load is
closer to 99%.
One can imagine many more situations where this behavior of the kernel
will lead to quite erratic information inside `/proc/stat'.
/* gcc -o hog smallhog.c */
#include <time.h>
#include <limits.h>
#include <signal.h>
#include <sys/time.h>
#define HIST 10
static volatile sig_atomic_t stop;
static void sighandler (int signr)
{
(void) signr;
stop = 1;
}
static unsigned long hog (unsigned long niters)
{
stop = 0;
while (!stop && --niters);
return niters;
}
int main (void)
{
int i;
struct itimerval it = { .it_interval = { .tv_sec = 0, .tv_usec = 1 },
.it_value = { .tv_sec = 0, .tv_usec = 1 } };
sigset_t set;
unsigned long v[HIST];
double tmp = 0.0;
unsigned long n;
signal (SIGALRM, &sighandler);
setitimer (ITIMER_REAL, &it, NULL);
hog (ULONG_MAX);
for (i = 0; i < HIST; ++i) v[i] = ULONG_MAX - hog (ULONG_MAX);
for (i = 0; i < HIST; ++i) tmp += v[i];
tmp /= HIST;
n = tmp - (tmp / 3.0);
sigemptyset (&set);
sigaddset (&set, SIGALRM);
for (;;) {
hog (n);
sigwait (&set, &i);
}
return 0;
}
References
----------
http://lkml.org/lkml/2007/2/12/6
Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt (1.8)
Thanks
------
Con Kolivas, Pavel Machek

3
Documentation/cpusets.txt
View File

@ -557,6 +557,9 @@ Set some flags:
Add some cpus:
# /bin/echo 0-7 > cpus
Add some mems:
# /bin/echo 0-7 > mems
Now attach your shell to this cpuset:
# /bin/echo $$ > tasks

2
Documentation/crypto/api-intro.txt
View File

@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ Here's an example of how to use the API:
desc.tfm = tfm;
desc.flags = 0;
if (crypto_hash_digest(&desc, &sg, 2, result))
if (crypto_hash_digest(&desc, sg, 2, result))
fail();
crypto_free_hash(tfm);

4
Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt
View File

@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ runtime memory footprint:
Device Enumeration
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
As a rule, platform specific (and often board-specific) setup code wil
As a rule, platform specific (and often board-specific) setup code will
register platform devices:
int platform_device_register(struct platform_device *pdev);
@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ It's built from two components:
* platform_device.id ... the device instance number, or else "-1"
to indicate there's only one.
These are catenated, so name/id "serial"/0 indicates bus_id "serial.0", and
These are concatenated, so name/id "serial"/0 indicates bus_id "serial.0", and
"serial/3" indicates bus_id "serial.3"; both would use the platform_driver
named "serial". While "my_rtc"/-1 would be bus_id "my_rtc" (no instance id)
and use the platform_driver called "my_rtc".

98
Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
View File

@ -6,6 +6,18 @@ be removed from this file.
---------------------------
What: V4L2 VIDIOC_G_MPEGCOMP and VIDIOC_S_MPEGCOMP
When: October 2007
Why: Broken attempt to set MPEG compression parameters. These ioctls are
not able to implement the wide variety of parameters that can be set
by hardware MPEG encoders. A new MPEG control mechanism was created
in kernel 2.6.18 that replaces these ioctls. See the V4L2 specification
(section 1.9: Extended controls) for more information on this topic.
Who: Hans Verkuil <hverkuil@xs4all.nl> and
Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org>
---------------------------
What: /sys/devices/.../power/state
dev->power.power_state
dpm_runtime_{suspend,resume)()
@ -39,17 +51,6 @@ Who: Dan Dennedy <dan@dennedy.org>, Stefan Richter <stefanr@s5r6.in-berlin.de>
---------------------------
What: dv1394 driver (CONFIG_IEEE1394_DV1394)
When: June 2007
Why: Replaced by raw1394 + userspace libraries, notably libiec61883. This
shift of application support has been indicated on www.linux1394.org
and developers' mailinglists for quite some time. Major applications
have been converted, with the exception of ffmpeg and hence xine.
Piped output of dvgrab2 is a partial equivalent to dv1394.
Who: Dan Dennedy <dan@dennedy.org>, Stefan Richter <stefanr@s5r6.in-berlin.de>
---------------------------
What: Video4Linux API 1 ioctls and video_decoder.h from Video devices.
When: December 2006
Why: V4L1 AP1 was replaced by V4L2 API. during migration from 2.4 to 2.6
@ -145,15 +146,6 @@ Who: Arjan van de Ven <arjan@linux.intel.com>
---------------------------
What: mount/umount uevents
When: February 2007
Why: These events are not correct, and do not properly let userspace know
when a file system has been mounted or unmounted. Userspace should
poll the /proc/mounts file instead to detect this properly.
Who: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
---------------------------
What: USB driver API moves to EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL
When: February 2008
Files: include/linux/usb.h, drivers/usb/core/driver.c
@ -222,15 +214,6 @@ Who: Adrian Bunk <bunk@stusta.de>
---------------------------
What: IPv4 only connection tracking/NAT/helpers
When: 2.6.22
Why: The new layer 3 independant connection tracking replaces the old
IPv4 only version. After some stabilization of the new code the
old one will be removed.
Who: Patrick McHardy <kaber@trash.net>
---------------------------
What: ACPI hooks (X86_SPEEDSTEP_CENTRINO_ACPI) in speedstep-centrino driver
When: December 2006
Why: Speedstep-centrino driver with ACPI hooks and acpi-cpufreq driver are
@ -253,29 +236,6 @@ Who: Venkatesh Pallipadi <venkatesh.pallipadi@intel.com>
---------------------------
<<<<<<< test:Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
What: ACPI hotkey driver (CONFIG_ACPI_HOTKEY)
When: 2.6.21
Why: hotkey.c was an attempt to consolidate multiple drivers that use
ACPI to implement hotkeys. However, hotkeys are not documented
in the ACPI specification, so the drivers used undocumented
vendor-specific hooks and turned out to be more different than
the same.
Further, the keys and the features supplied by each platform
are different, so there will always be a need for
platform-specific drivers.
So the new plan is to delete hotkey.c and instead, work on the
platform specific drivers to try to make them look the same
to the user when they supply the same features.
hotkey.c has always depended on CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL
Who: Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com>
---------------------------
What: /sys/firmware/acpi/namespace
When: 2.6.21
Why: The ACPI namespace is effectively the symbol list for
@ -306,13 +266,6 @@ Who: Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com>
---------------------------
What: JFFS (version 1)
When: 2.6.21
Why: Unmaintained for years, superceded by JFFS2 for years.
Who: Jeff Garzik <jeff@garzik.org>
---------------------------
What: sk98lin network driver
When: July 2007
Why: In kernel tree version of driver is unmaintained. Sk98lin driver
@ -334,3 +287,30 @@ Why: The code says it was obsolete when it was written in 2001.
Who: Richard Purdie <rpurdie@rpsys.net>
---------------------------
What: i8xx_tco watchdog driver
When: in 2.6.22
Why: the i8xx_tco watchdog driver has been replaced by the iTCO_wdt
watchdog driver.
Who: Wim Van Sebroeck <wim@iguana.be>
---------------------------
What: Multipath cached routing support in ipv4
When: in 2.6.23
Why: Code was merged, then submitter immediately disappeared leaving
us with no maintainer and lots of bugs. The code should not have
been merged in the first place, and many aspects of it's
implementation are blocking more critical core networking
development. It's marked EXPERIMENTAL and no distribution
enables it because it cause obscure crashes due to unfixable bugs
(interfaces don't return errors so memory allocation can't be
handled, calling contexts of these interfaces make handling
errors impossible too because they get called after we've
totally commited to creating a route object, for example).
This problem has existed for years and no forward progress
has ever been made, and nobody steps up to try and salvage
this code, so we're going to finally just get rid of it.
Who: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
---------------------------

4
Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX
View File

@ -4,6 +4,8 @@ Exporting
- explanation of how to make filesystems exportable.
Locking
- info on locking rules as they pertain to Linux VFS.
9p.txt
- 9p (v9fs) is an implementation of the Plan 9 remote fs protocol.
adfs.txt
- info and mount options for the Acorn Advanced Disc Filing System.
afs.txt
@ -82,8 +84,6 @@ udf.txt
- info and mount options for the UDF filesystem.
ufs.txt
- info on the ufs filesystem.
v9fs.txt
- v9fs is a Unix implementation of the Plan 9 9p remote fs protocol.
vfat.txt
- info on using the VFAT filesystem used in Windows NT and Windows 95
vfs.txt

4
Documentation/filesystems/9p.txt
View File

@ -40,6 +40,10 @@ OPTIONS
aname=name aname specifies the file tree to access when the server is
offering several exported file systems.
cache=mode specifies a cacheing policy. By default, no caches are used.
loose = no attempts are made at consistency,
intended for exclusive, read-only mounts
debug=n specifies debug level. The debug level is a bitmask.
0x01 = display verbose error messages
0x02 = developer debug (DEBUG_CURRENT)

202
Documentation/filesystems/afs.txt
View File

@ -1,31 +1,82 @@
====================
kAFS: AFS FILESYSTEM
====================
ABOUT
=====
Contents:
This filesystem provides a fairly simple AFS filesystem driver. It is under
development and only provides very basic facilities. It does not yet support
the following AFS features:
- Overview.
- Usage.
- Mountpoints.
- Proc filesystem.
- The cell database.
- Security.
- Examples.
========
OVERVIEW
========
This filesystem provides a fairly simple secure AFS filesystem driver. It is
under development and does not yet provide the full feature set. The features
it does support include:
(*) Security (currently only AFS kaserver and KerberosIV tickets).
(*) File reading.
(*) Automounting.
It does not yet support the following AFS features:
(*) Write support.
(*) Communications security.
(*) Local caching.
(*) pioctl() system call.
(*) Automatic mounting of embedded mountpoints.
===========
COMPILATION
===========
The filesystem should be enabled by turning on the kernel configuration
options:
CONFIG_AF_RXRPC - The RxRPC protocol transport
CONFIG_RXKAD - The RxRPC Kerberos security handler
CONFIG_AFS - The AFS filesystem
Additionally, the following can be turned on to aid debugging:
CONFIG_AF_RXRPC_DEBUG - Permit AF_RXRPC debugging to be enabled
CONFIG_AFS_DEBUG - Permit AFS debugging to be enabled
They permit the debugging messages to be turned on dynamically by manipulating
the masks in the following files:
/sys/module/af_rxrpc/parameters/debug
/sys/module/afs/parameters/debug
=====
USAGE
=====
When inserting the driver modules the root cell must be specified along with a
list of volume location server IP addresses:
insmod rxrpc.o
insmod af_rxrpc.o
insmod rxkad.o
insmod kafs.o rootcell=cambridge.redhat.com:172.16.18.73:172.16.18.91
The first module is a driver for the RxRPC remote operation protocol, and the
second is the actual filesystem driver for the AFS filesystem.
The first module is the AF_RXRPC network protocol driver. This provides the
RxRPC remote operation protocol and may also be accessed from userspace. See:
Documentation/networking/rxrpc.txt
The second module is the kerberos RxRPC security driver, and the third module
is the actual filesystem driver for the AFS filesystem.
Once the module has been loaded, more modules can be added by the following
procedure:
@ -33,7 +84,7 @@ procedure:
echo add grand.central.org 18.7.14.88:128.2.191.224 >/proc/fs/afs/cells
Where the parameters to the "add" command are the name of a cell and a list of
volume location servers within that cell.
volume location servers within that cell, with the latter separated by colons.
Filesystems can be mounted anywhere by commands similar to the following:
@ -42,11 +93,6 @@ Filesystems can be mounted anywhere by commands similar to the following:
mount -t afs "#root.afs." /afs
mount -t afs "#root.cell." /afs/cambridge
NB: When using this on Linux 2.4, the mount command has to be different,
since the filesystem doesn't have access to the device name argument:
mount -t afs none /afs -ovol="#root.afs."
Where the initial character is either a hash or a percent symbol depending on
whether you definitely want a R/W volume (hash) or whether you'd prefer a R/O
volume, but are willing to use a R/W volume instead (percent).
@ -60,55 +106,66 @@ named volume will be looked up in the cell specified during insmod.
Additional cells can be added through /proc (see later section).
===========
MOUNTPOINTS
===========
AFS has a concept of mountpoints. These are specially formatted symbolic links
(of the same form as the "device name" passed to mount). kAFS presents these
to the user as directories that have special properties:
AFS has a concept of mountpoints. In AFS terms, these are specially formatted
symbolic links (of the same form as the "device name" passed to mount). kAFS
presents these to the user as directories that have a follow-link capability
(ie: symbolic link semantics). If anyone attempts to access them, they will
automatically cause the target volume to be mounted (if possible) on that site.
(*) They cannot be listed. Running a program like "ls" on them will incur an
EREMOTE error (Object is remote).
Automatically mounted filesystems will be automatically unmounted approximately
twenty minutes after they were last used. Alternatively they can be unmounted
directly with the umount() system call.
(*) Other objects can't be looked up inside of them. This also incurs an
EREMOTE error.
Manually unmounting an AFS volume will cause any idle submounts upon it to be
culled first. If all are culled, then the requested volume will also be
unmounted, otherwise error EBUSY will be returned.
(*) They can be queried with the readlink() system call, which will return
the name of the mountpoint to which they point. The "readlink" program
will also work.
This can be used by the administrator to attempt to unmount the whole AFS tree
mounted on /afs in one go by doing:
(*) They can be mounted on (which symbolic links can't).
umount /afs
===============
PROC FILESYSTEM
===============
The rxrpc module creates a number of files in various places in the /proc
filesystem:
(*) Firstly, some information files are made available in a directory called
"/proc/net/rxrpc/". These list the extant transport endpoint, peer,
connection and call records.
(*) Secondly, some control files are made available in a directory called
"/proc/sys/rxrpc/". Currently, all these files can be used for is to
turn on various levels of tracing.
The AFS modules creates a "/proc/fs/afs/" directory and populates it:
(*) A "cells" file that lists cells currently known to the afs module.
(*) A "cells" file that lists cells currently known to the afs module and
their usage counts:
[root@andromeda ~]# cat /proc/fs/afs/cells
USE NAME
3 cambridge.redhat.com
(*) A directory per cell that contains files that list volume location
servers, volumes, and active servers known within that cell.
[root@andromeda ~]# cat /proc/fs/afs/cambridge.redhat.com/servers
USE ADDR STATE
4 172.16.18.91 0
[root@andromeda ~]# cat /proc/fs/afs/cambridge.redhat.com/vlservers
ADDRESS
172.16.18.91
[root@andromeda ~]# cat /proc/fs/afs/cambridge.redhat.com/volumes
USE STT VLID[0] VLID[1] VLID[2] NAME
1 Val 20000000 20000001 20000002 root.afs
=================
THE CELL DATABASE
=================
The filesystem maintains an internal database of all the cells it knows and
the IP addresses of the volume location servers for those cells. The cell to
which the computer belongs is added to the database when insmod is performed
by the "rootcell=" argument.
The filesystem maintains an internal database of all the cells it knows and the
IP addresses of the volume location servers for those cells. The cell to which
the system belongs is added to the database when insmod is performed by the
"rootcell=" argument or, if compiled in, using a "kafs.rootcell=" argument on
the kernel command line.
Further cells can be added by commands similar to the following:
@ -118,6 +175,50 @@ Further cells can be added by commands similar to the following:
No other cell database operations are available at this time.
========
SECURITY
========
Secure operations are initiated by acquiring a key using the klog program. A
very primitive klog program is available at:
http://people.redhat.com/~dhowells/rxrpc/klog.c
This should be compiled by:
make klog LDLIBS="-lcrypto -lcrypt -lkrb4 -lkeyutils"
And then run as:
./klog
Assuming it's successful, this adds a key of type RxRPC, named for the service
and cell, eg: "afs@<cellname>". This can be viewed with the keyctl program or
by cat'ing /proc/keys:
[root@andromeda ~]# keyctl show
Session Keyring
-3 --alswrv 0 0 keyring: _ses.3268
2 --alswrv 0 0 \_ keyring: _uid.0
111416553 --als--v 0 0 \_ rxrpc: afs@CAMBRIDGE.REDHAT.COM
Currently the username, realm, password and proposed ticket lifetime are
compiled in to the program.
It is not required to acquire a key before using AFS facilities, but if one is
not acquired then all operations will be governed by the anonymous user parts
of the ACLs.
If a key is acquired, then all AFS operations, including mounts and automounts,
made by a possessor of that key will be secured with that key.
If a file is opened with a particular key and then the file descriptor is
passed to a process that doesn't have that key (perhaps over an AF_UNIX
socket), then the operations on the file will be made with key that was used to
open the file.
========
EXAMPLES
========
@ -125,8 +226,9 @@ Here's what I use to test this. Some of the names and IP addresses are local
to my internal DNS. My "root.afs" partition has a mount point within it for
some public volumes volumes.
insmod -S /tmp/rxrpc.o
insmod -S /tmp/kafs.o rootcell=cambridge.redhat.com:172.16.18.73:172.16.18.91
insmod /tmp/rxrpc.o
insmod /tmp/rxkad.o
insmod /tmp/kafs.o rootcell=cambridge.redhat.com:172.16.18.91
mount -t afs \%root.afs. /afs
mount -t afs \%cambridge.redhat.com:root.cell. /afs/cambridge.redhat.com/
@ -141,15 +243,7 @@ mount -t afs "#grand.central.org:root.service." /afs/grand.central.org/service
mount -t afs "#grand.central.org:root.software." /afs/grand.central.org/software
mount -t afs "#grand.central.org:root.user." /afs/grand.central.org/user
umount /afs/grand.central.org/user
umount /afs/grand.central.org/software
umount /afs/grand.central.org/service
umount /afs/grand.central.org/project
umount /afs/grand.central.org/doc
umount /afs/grand.central.org/contrib
umount /afs/grand.central.org/archive
umount /afs/grand.central.org
umount /afs/cambridge.redhat.com
umount /afs
rmmod kafs
rmmod rxkad
rmmod rxrpc

114
Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
View File

@ -41,6 +41,7 @@ Table of Contents
2.11 /proc/sys/fs/mqueue - POSIX message queues filesystem
2.12 /proc/<pid>/oom_adj - Adjust the oom-killer score
2.13 /proc/<pid>/oom_score - Display current oom-killer score
2.14 /proc/<pid>/io - Display the IO accounting fields
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Preface
@ -1420,6 +1421,15 @@ fewer messages that will be written. Message_burst controls when messages will
be dropped. The default settings limit warning messages to one every five
seconds.
warnings
--------
This controls console messages from the networking stack that can occur because
of problems on the network like duplicate address or bad checksums. Normally,
this should be enabled, but if the problem persists the messages can be
disabled.
netdev_max_backlog
------------------
@ -1990,3 +2000,107 @@ need to recompile the kernel, or even to reboot the system. The files in the
command to write value into these files, thereby changing the default settings
of the kernel.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.14 /proc/<pid>/io - Display the IO accounting fields
-------------------------------------------------------
This file contains IO statistics for each running process
Example
-------
test:/tmp # dd if=/dev/zero of=/tmp/test.dat &
[1] 3828
test:/tmp # cat /proc/3828/io
rchar: 323934931
wchar: 323929600
syscr: 632687
syscw: 632675
read_bytes: 0
write_bytes: 323932160
cancelled_write_bytes: 0
Description
-----------
rchar
-----
I/O counter: chars read
The number of bytes which this task has caused to be read from storage. This
is simply the sum of bytes which this process passed to read() and pread().
It includes things like tty IO and it is unaffected by whether or not actual
physical disk IO was required (the read might have been satisfied from
pagecache)
wchar
-----
I/O counter: chars written
The number of bytes which this task has caused, or shall cause to be written
to disk. Similar caveats apply here as with rchar.
syscr
-----
I/O counter: read syscalls
Attempt to count the number of read I/O operations, i.e. syscalls like read()
and pread().
syscw
-----
I/O counter: write syscalls
Attempt to count the number of write I/O operations, i.e. syscalls like
write() and pwrite().
read_bytes
----------
I/O counter: bytes read
Attempt to count the number of bytes which this process really did cause to
be fetched from the storage layer. Done at the submit_bio() level, so it is
accurate for block-backed filesystems. <please add status regarding NFS and
CIFS at a later time>
write_bytes
-----------
I/O counter: bytes written
Attempt to count the number of bytes which this process caused to be sent to
the storage layer. This is done at page-dirtying time.
cancelled_write_bytes
---------------------
The big inaccuracy here is truncate. If a process writes 1MB to a file and
then deletes the file, it will in fact perform no writeout. But it will have
been accounted as having caused 1MB of write.
In other words: The number of bytes which this process caused to not happen,
by truncating pagecache. A task can cause "negative" IO too. If this task
truncates some dirty pagecache, some IO which another task has been accounted
for (in it's write_bytes) will not be happening. We _could_ just subtract that
from the truncating task's write_bytes, but there is information loss in doing
that.
Note
----
At its current implementation state, this is a bit racy on 32-bit machines: if
process A reads process B's /proc/pid/io while process B is updating one of
those 64-bit counters, process A could see an intermediate result.
More information about this can be found within the taskstats documentation in
Documentation/accounting.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2
Documentation/filesystems/sysfs-pci.txt
View File

@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Accessing legacy resources through sysfs
----------------------------------------
Legacy I/O port and ISA memory resources are also provided in sysfs if the
underlying platform supports them. They're located in the PCI class heirarchy,
underlying platform supports them. They're located in the PCI class hierarchy,
e.g.
/sys/class/pci_bus/0000:17/

5
Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
View File

@ -617,6 +617,11 @@ struct address_space_operations {
In this case the prepare_write will be retried one the lock is
regained.
Note: the page _must not_ be marked uptodate in this function
(or anywhere else) unless it actually is uptodate right now. As
soon as a page is marked uptodate, it is possible for a concurrent
read(2) to copy it to userspace.
commit_write: If prepare_write succeeds, new data will be copied
into the page and then commit_write will be called. It will
typically update the size of the file (if appropriate) and

36
Documentation/gpio.txt
View File

@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ The exact capabilities of GPIOs vary between systems. Common options:
- Output values are writable (high=1, low=0). Some chips also have
options about how that value is driven, so that for example only one
value might be driven ... supporting "wire-OR" and similar schemes
for the other value.
for the other value (notably, "open drain" signaling).
- Input values are likewise readable (1, 0). Some chips support readback
of pins configured as "output", which is very useful in such "wire-OR"
@ -105,12 +105,15 @@ setting up a platform_device using the GPIO, is mark its direction:
/* set as input or output, returning 0 or negative errno */
int gpio_direction_input(unsigned gpio);
int gpio_direction_output(unsigned gpio);
int gpio_direction_output(unsigned gpio, int value);
The return value is zero for success, else a negative errno. It should
be checked, since the get/set calls don't have error returns and since
misconfiguration is possible. (These calls could sleep.)
For output GPIOs, the value provided becomes the initial output value.
This helps avoid signal glitching during system startup.
Setting the direction can fail if the GPIO number is invalid, or when
that particular GPIO can't be used in that mode. It's generally a bad
idea to rely on boot firmware to have set the direction correctly, since
@ -244,6 +247,35 @@ with gpio_get_value(), for example to initialize or update driver state
when the IRQ is edge-triggered.
Emulating Open Drain Signals
----------------------------
Sometimes shared signals need to use "open drain" signaling, where only the
low signal level is actually driven. (That term applies to CMOS transistors;
"open collector" is used for TTL.) A pullup resistor causes the high signal
level. This is sometimes called a "wire-AND"; or more practically, from the
negative logic (low=true) perspective this is a "wire-OR".
One common example of an open drain signal is a shared active-low IRQ line.
Also, bidirectional data bus signals sometimes use open drain signals.
Some GPIO controllers directly support open drain outputs; many don't. When
you need open drain signaling but your hardware doesn't directly support it,
there's a common idiom you can use to emulate it with any GPIO pin that can
be used as either an input or an output:
LOW: gpio_direction_output(gpio, 0) ... this drives the signal
and overrides the pullup.
HIGH: gpio_direction_input(gpio) ... this turns off the output,
so the pullup (or some other device) controls the signal.
If you are "driving" the signal high but gpio_get_value(gpio) reports a low
value (after the appropriate rise time passes), you know some other component
is driving the shared signal low. That's not necessarily an error. As one
common example, that's how I2C clocks are stretched: a slave that needs a
slower clock delays the rising edge of SCK, and the I2C master adjusts its
signaling rate accordingly.
What do these conventions omit?
===============================

10
Documentation/hwmon/it87
View File

@ -135,6 +135,16 @@ Give 0 for unused sensor. Any other value is invalid. To configure this at
startup, consult lm_sensors's /etc/sensors.conf. (2 = thermistor;
3 = thermal diode)
Fan speed control
-----------------
The fan speed control features are limited to manual PWM mode. Automatic
"Smart Guardian" mode control handling is not implemented. However
if you want to go for "manual mode" just write 1 to pwmN_enable.
If you are only able to control the fan speed with very small PWM values,
try lowering the PWM base frequency (pwm1_freq). Depending on the fan,
it may give you a somewhat greater control range. The same frequency is
used to drive all fan outputs, which is why pwm2_freq and pwm3_freq are
read-only.

15
Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface
View File

@ -166,16 +166,21 @@ pwm[1-*] Pulse width modulation fan control.
pwm[1-*]_enable
Switch PWM on and off.
Not always present even if fan*_pwm is.
Not always present even if pwmN is.
0: turn off
1: turn on in manual mode
2+: turn on in automatic mode
Check individual chip documentation files for automatic mode details.
Check individual chip documentation files for automatic mode
details.
RW
pwm[1-*]_mode
0: DC mode
1: PWM mode
pwm[1-*]_mode 0: DC mode (direct current)
1: PWM mode (pulse-width modulation)
RW
pwm[1-*]_freq Base PWM frequency in Hz.
Only possibly available when pwmN_mode is PWM, but not always
present even then.
RW
pwm[1-*]_auto_channels_temp

54
Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf
View File

@ -2,26 +2,29 @@ Kernel driver w83627ehf
=======================
Supported chips:
* Winbond W83627EHF/EHG (ISA access ONLY)
* Winbond W83627EHF/EHG/DHG (ISA access ONLY)
Prefix: 'w83627ehf'
Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
Datasheet: http://www.winbond-usa.com/products/winbond_products/pdfs/PCIC/W83627EHF_%20W83627EHGb.pdf
Datasheet:
http://www.winbond-usa.com/products/winbond_products/pdfs/PCIC/W83627EHF_%20W83627EHGb.pdf
DHG datasheet confidential.
Authors:
Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
Yuan Mu (Winbond)
Rudolf Marek <r.marek@assembler.cz>
David Hubbard <david.c.hubbard@gmail.com>
Description
-----------
This driver implements support for the Winbond W83627EHF and W83627EHG
super I/O chips. We will refer to them collectively as Winbond chips.
This driver implements support for the Winbond W83627EHF, W83627EHG, and
W83627DHG super I/O chips. We will refer to them collectively as Winbond chips.
The chips implement three temperature sensors, five fan rotation
speed sensors, ten analog voltage sensors, alarms with beep warnings (control
unimplemented), and some automatic fan regulation strategies (plus manual
fan control mode).
speed sensors, ten analog voltage sensors (only nine for the 627DHG), alarms
with beep warnings (control unimplemented), and some automatic fan regulation
strategies (plus manual fan control mode).
Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius and measurement resolution is 1
degC for temp1 and 0.5 degC for temp2 and temp3. An alarm is triggered when
@ -55,6 +58,9 @@ prog -> pwm4 (the programmable setting is not supported by the driver)
/sys files
----------
name - this is a standard hwmon device entry. For the W83627EHF and W83627EHG,
it is set to "w83627ehf" and for the W83627DHG it is set to "w83627dhg"
pwm[1-4] - this file stores PWM duty cycle or DC value (fan speed) in range:
0 (stop) to 255 (full)
@ -83,3 +89,37 @@ pwm[1-4]_stop_time - how many milliseconds [ms] must elapse to switch
Note: last two functions are influenced by other control bits, not yet exported
by the driver, so a change might not have any effect.
Implementation Details
----------------------
Future driver development should bear in mind that the following registers have
different functions on the 627EHF and the 627DHG. Some registers also have
different power-on default values, but BIOS should already be loading
appropriate defaults. Note that bank selection must be performed as is currently
done in the driver for all register addresses.
0x49: only on DHG, selects temperature source for AUX fan, CPU fan0
0x4a: not completely documented for the EHF and the DHG documentation assigns
different behavior to bits 7 and 6, including extending the temperature
input selection to SmartFan I, not just SmartFan III. Testing on the EHF
will reveal whether they are compatible or not.
0x58: Chip ID: 0xa1=EHF 0xc1=DHG
0x5e: only on DHG, has bits to enable "current mode" temperature detection and
critical temperature protection
0x45b: only on EHF, bit 3, vin4 alarm (EHF supports 10 inputs, only 9 on DHG)
0x552: only on EHF, vin4
0x558: only on EHF, vin4 high limit
0x559: only on EHF, vin4 low limit
0x6b: only on DHG, SYS fan critical temperature
0x6c: only on DHG, CPU fan0 critical temperature
0x6d: only on DHG, AUX fan critical temperature
0x6e: only on DHG, CPU fan1 critical temperature
0x50-0x55 and 0x650-0x657 are marked "Test Register" for the EHF, but "Reserved
Register" for the DHG
The DHG also supports PECI, where the DHG queries Intel CPU temperatures, and
the ICH8 southbridge gets that data via PECI from the DHG, so that the
southbridge drives the fans. And the DHG supports SST, a one-wire serial bus.

728
Documentation/ibm-acpi.txt
View File

@ -1,728 +0,0 @@
IBM ThinkPad ACPI Extras Driver
Version 0.12
17 August 2005
Borislav Deianov <borislav@users.sf.net>
http://ibm-acpi.sf.net/
This is a Linux ACPI driver for the IBM ThinkPad laptops. It supports
various features of these laptops which are accessible through the
ACPI framework but not otherwise supported by the generic Linux ACPI
drivers.
Status
------
The features currently supported are the following (see below for
detailed description):
- Fn key combinations
- Bluetooth enable and disable
- video output switching, expansion control
- ThinkLight on and off
- limited docking and undocking
- UltraBay eject
- CMOS control
- LED control
- ACPI sounds
- temperature sensors
- Experimental: embedded controller register dump
- LCD brightness control
- Volume control
- Experimental: fan speed, fan enable/disable
- Experimental: WAN enable and disable
A compatibility table by model and feature is maintained on the web
site, http://ibm-acpi.sf.net/. I appreciate any success or failure
reports, especially if they add to or correct the compatibility table.
Please include the following information in your report:
- ThinkPad model name
- a copy of your DSDT, from /proc/acpi/dsdt
- which driver features work and which don't
- the observed behavior of non-working features
Any other comments or patches are also more than welcome.
Installation
------------
If you are compiling this driver as included in the Linux kernel
sources, simply enable the CONFIG_ACPI_IBM option (Power Management /
ACPI / IBM ThinkPad Laptop Extras).
Features
--------
The driver creates the /proc/acpi/ibm directory. There is a file under
that directory for each feature described below. Note that while the
driver is still in the alpha stage, the exact proc file format and
commands supported by the various features is guaranteed to change
frequently.
Driver version -- /proc/acpi/ibm/driver
---------------------------------------
The driver name and version. No commands can be written to this file.
Hot keys -- /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey
---------------------------------
Without this driver, only the Fn-F4 key (sleep button) generates an
ACPI event. With the driver loaded, the hotkey feature enabled and the
mask set (see below), the various hot keys generate ACPI events in the
following format:
ibm/hotkey HKEY 00000080 0000xxxx
The last four digits vary depending on the key combination pressed.
All labeled Fn-Fx key combinations generate distinct events. In
addition, the lid microswitch and some docking station buttons may
also generate such events.
The following commands can be written to this file:
echo enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- enable the hot keys feature
echo disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- disable the hot keys feature
echo 0xffff > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- enable all possible hot keys
echo 0x0000 > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- disable all possible hot keys
... any other 4-hex-digit mask ...
echo reset > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- restore the original mask
The bit mask allows some control over which hot keys generate ACPI
events. Not all bits in the mask can be modified. Not all bits that
can be modified do anything. Not all hot keys can be individually
controlled by the mask. Most recent ThinkPad models honor the
following bits (assuming the hot keys feature has been enabled):
key bit behavior when set behavior when unset
Fn-F3 always generates ACPI event
Fn-F4 always generates ACPI event
Fn-F5 0010 generate ACPI event enable/disable Bluetooth
Fn-F7 0040 generate ACPI event switch LCD and external display
Fn-F8 0080 generate ACPI event expand screen or none
Fn-F9 0100 generate ACPI event none
Fn-F12 always generates ACPI event
Some models do not support all of the above. For example, the T30 does
not support Fn-F5 and Fn-F9. Other models do not support the mask at
all. On those models, hot keys cannot be controlled individually.
Note that enabling ACPI events for some keys prevents their default
behavior. For example, if events for Fn-F5 are enabled, that key will
no longer enable/disable Bluetooth by itself. This can still be done
from an acpid handler for the ibm/hotkey event.
Note also that not all Fn key combinations are supported through
ACPI. For example, on the X40, the brightness, volume and "Access IBM"
buttons do not generate ACPI events even with this driver. They *can*
be used through the "ThinkPad Buttons" utility, see
http://www.nongnu.org/tpb/
Bluetooth -- /proc/acpi/ibm/bluetooth
-------------------------------------
This feature shows the presence and current state of a Bluetooth
device. If Bluetooth is installed, the following commands can be used:
echo enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/bluetooth
echo disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/bluetooth
Video output control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/video
--------------------------------------------
This feature allows control over the devices used for video output -
LCD, CRT or DVI (if available). The following commands are available:
echo lcd_enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo lcd_disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo crt_enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo crt_disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo dvi_enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo dvi_disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo auto_enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo auto_disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo expand_toggle > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo video_switch > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
Each video output device can be enabled or disabled individually.
Reading /proc/acpi/ibm/video shows the status of each device.
Automatic video switching can be enabled or disabled. When automatic
video switching is enabled, certain events (e.g. opening the lid,
docking or undocking) cause the video output device to change
automatically. While this can be useful, it also causes flickering
and, on the X40, video corruption. By disabling automatic switching,
the flickering or video corruption can be avoided.
The video_switch command cycles through the available video outputs
(it simulates the behavior of Fn-F7).
Video expansion can be toggled through this feature. This controls
whether the display is expanded to fill the entire LCD screen when a
mode with less than full resolution is used. Note that the current
video expansion status cannot be determined through this feature.
Note that on many models (particularly those using Radeon graphics
chips) the X driver configures the video card in a way which prevents
Fn-F7 from working. This also disables the video output switching
features of this driver, as it uses the same ACPI methods as
Fn-F7. Video switching on the console should still work.
UPDATE: There's now a patch for the X.org Radeon driver which
addresses this issue. Some people are reporting success with the patch
while others are still having problems. For more information:
https://bugs.freedesktop.org/show_bug.cgi?id=2000
ThinkLight control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/light
------------------------------------------
The current status of the ThinkLight can be found in this file. A few
models which do not make the status available will show it as
"unknown". The available commands are:
echo on > /proc/acpi/ibm/light
echo off > /proc/acpi/ibm/light
Docking / undocking -- /proc/acpi/ibm/dock
------------------------------------------
Docking and undocking (e.g. with the X4 UltraBase) requires some
actions to be taken by the operating system to safely make or break
the electrical connections with the dock.
The docking feature of this driver generates the following ACPI events:
ibm/dock GDCK 00000003 00000001 -- eject request
ibm/dock GDCK 00000003 00000002 -- undocked
ibm/dock GDCK 00000000 00000003 -- docked
NOTE: These events will only be generated if the laptop was docked
when originally booted. This is due to the current lack of support for
hot plugging of devices in the Linux ACPI framework. If the laptop was
booted while not in the dock, the following message is shown in the
logs:
Mar 17 01:42:34 aero kernel: ibm_acpi: dock device not present
In this case, no dock-related events are generated but the dock and
undock commands described below still work. They can be executed
manually or triggered by Fn key combinations (see the example acpid
configuration files included in the driver tarball package available
on the web site).
When the eject request button on the dock is pressed, the first event
above is generated. The handler for this event should issue the
following command:
echo undock > /proc/acpi/ibm/dock
After the LED on the dock goes off, it is safe to eject the laptop.
Note: if you pressed this key by mistake, go ahead and eject the
laptop, then dock it back in. Otherwise, the dock may not function as
expected.
When the laptop is docked, the third event above is generated. The
handler for this event should issue the following command to fully
enable the dock:
echo dock > /proc/acpi/ibm/dock
The contents of the /proc/acpi/ibm/dock file shows the current status
of the dock, as provided by the ACPI framework.
The docking support in this driver does not take care of enabling or
disabling any other devices you may have attached to the dock. For
example, a CD drive plugged into the UltraBase needs to be disabled or
enabled separately. See the provided example acpid configuration files
for how this can be accomplished.
There is no support yet for PCI devices that may be attached to a
docking station, e.g. in the ThinkPad Dock II. The driver currently
does not recognize, enable or disable such devices. This means that
the only docking stations currently supported are the X-series
UltraBase docks and "dumb" port replicators like the Mini Dock (the
latter don't need any ACPI support, actually).
UltraBay eject -- /proc/acpi/ibm/bay
------------------------------------
Inserting or ejecting an UltraBay device requires some actions to be
taken by the operating system to safely make or break the electrical
connections with the device.
This feature generates the following ACPI events:
ibm/bay MSTR 00000003 00000000 -- eject request
ibm/bay MSTR 00000001 00000000 -- eject lever inserted
NOTE: These events will only be generated if the UltraBay was present
when the laptop was originally booted (on the X series, the UltraBay
is in the dock, so it may not be present if the laptop was undocked).
This is due to the current lack of support for hot plugging of devices
in the Linux ACPI framework. If the laptop was booted without the
UltraBay, the following message is shown in the logs:
Mar 17 01:42:34 aero kernel: ibm_acpi: bay device not present
In this case, no bay-related events are generated but the eject
command described below still works. It can be executed manually or
triggered by a hot key combination.
Sliding the eject lever generates the first event shown above. The
handler for this event should take whatever actions are necessary to
shut down the device in the UltraBay (e.g. call idectl), then issue
the following command:
echo eject > /proc/acpi/ibm/bay
After the LED on the UltraBay goes off, it is safe to pull out the
device.
When the eject lever is inserted, the second event above is
generated. The handler for this event should take whatever actions are
necessary to enable the UltraBay device (e.g. call idectl).
The contents of the /proc/acpi/ibm/bay file shows the current status
of the UltraBay, as provided by the ACPI framework.
EXPERIMENTAL warm eject support on the 600e/x, A22p and A3x (To use
this feature, you need to supply the experimental=1 parameter when
loading the module):
These models do not have a button near the UltraBay device to request
a hot eject but rather require the laptop to be put to sleep
(suspend-to-ram) before the bay device is ejected or inserted).
The sequence of steps to eject the device is as follows:
echo eject > /proc/acpi/ibm/bay
put the ThinkPad to sleep
remove the drive
resume from sleep
cat /proc/acpi/ibm/bay should show that the drive was removed
On the A3x, both the UltraBay 2000 and UltraBay Plus devices are
supported. Use "eject2" instead of "eject" for the second bay.
Note: the UltraBay eject support on the 600e/x, A22p and A3x is
EXPERIMENTAL and may not work as expected. USE WITH CAUTION!
CMOS control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/cmos
-----------------------------------
This feature is used internally by the ACPI firmware to control the
ThinkLight on most newer ThinkPad models. It may also control LCD
brightness, sounds volume and more, but only on some models.
The commands are non-negative integer numbers:
echo 0 >/proc/acpi/ibm/cmos
echo 1 >/proc/acpi/ibm/cmos
echo 2 >/proc/acpi/ibm/cmos
...
The range of valid numbers is 0 to 21, but not all have an effect and
the behavior varies from model to model. Here is the behavior on the
X40 (tpb is the ThinkPad Buttons utility):
0 - no effect but tpb reports "Volume down"
1 - no effect but tpb reports "Volume up"
2 - no effect but tpb reports "Mute on"
3 - simulate pressing the "Access IBM" button
4 - LCD brightness up
5 - LCD brightness down
11 - toggle screen expansion
12 - ThinkLight on
13 - ThinkLight off
14 - no effect but tpb reports ThinkLight status change
LED control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/led
---------------------------------
Some of the LED indicators can be controlled through this feature. The
available commands are:
echo '<led number> on' >/proc/acpi/ibm/led
echo '<led number> off' >/proc/acpi/ibm/led
echo '<led number> blink' >/proc/acpi/ibm/led
The <led number> range is 0 to 7. The set of LEDs that can be
controlled varies from model to model. Here is the mapping on the X40:
0 - power
1 - battery (orange)
2 - battery (green)
3 - UltraBase
4 - UltraBay
7 - standby
All of the above can be turned on and off and can be made to blink.
ACPI sounds -- /proc/acpi/ibm/beep
----------------------------------
The BEEP method is used internally by the ACPI firmware to provide
audible alerts in various situations. This feature allows the same
sounds to be triggered manually.
The commands are non-negative integer numbers:
echo <number> >/proc/acpi/ibm/beep
The valid <number> range is 0 to 17. Not all numbers trigger sounds
and the sounds vary from model to model. Here is the behavior on the
X40:
0 - stop a sound in progress (but use 17 to stop 16)
2 - two beeps, pause, third beep ("low battery")
3 - single beep
4 - high, followed by low-pitched beep ("unable")
5 - single beep
6 - very high, followed by high-pitched beep ("AC/DC")
7 - high-pitched beep
9 - three short beeps
10 - very long beep
12 - low-pitched beep
15 - three high-pitched beeps repeating constantly, stop with 0
16 - one medium-pitched beep repeating constantly, stop with 17
17 - stop 16
Temperature sensors -- /proc/acpi/ibm/thermal
---------------------------------------------
Most ThinkPads include six or more separate temperature sensors but
only expose the CPU temperature through the standard ACPI methods.
This feature shows readings from up to eight different sensors on older
ThinkPads, and it has experimental support for up to sixteen different
sensors on newer ThinkPads. Readings from sensors that are not available
return -128.
No commands can be written to this file.
EXPERIMENTAL: The 16-sensors feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because the
implementation directly accesses hardware registers and may not work as
expected. USE WITH CAUTION! To use this feature, you need to supply the
experimental=1 parameter when loading the module. When EXPERIMENTAL
mode is enabled, reading the first 8 sensors on newer ThinkPads will
also use an new experimental thermal sensor access mode.
For example, on the X40, a typical output may be:
temperatures: 42 42 45 41 36 -128 33 -128
EXPERIMENTAL: On the T43/p, a typical output may be:
temperatures: 48 48 36 52 38 -128 31 -128 48 52 48 -128 -128 -128 -128 -128
The mapping of thermal sensors to physical locations varies depending on
system-board model (and thus, on ThinkPad model).
http://thinkwiki.org/wiki/Thermal_Sensors is a public wiki page that
tries to track down these locations for various models.
Most (newer?) models seem to follow this pattern:
1: CPU
2: (depends on model)
3: (depends on model)
4: GPU
5: Main battery: main sensor
6: Bay battery: main sensor
7: Main battery: secondary sensor
8: Bay battery: secondary sensor
9-15: (depends on model)
For the R51 (source: Thomas Gruber):
2: Mini-PCI
3: Internal HDD
For the T43, T43/p (source: Shmidoax/Thinkwiki.org)
http://thinkwiki.org/wiki/Thermal_Sensors#ThinkPad_T43.2C_T43p
2: System board, left side (near PCMCIA slot), reported as HDAPS temp
3: PCMCIA slot
9: MCH (northbridge) to DRAM Bus
10: ICH (southbridge), under Mini-PCI card, under touchpad
11: Power regulator, underside of system board, below F2 key
The A31 has a very atypical layout for the thermal sensors
(source: Milos Popovic, http://thinkwiki.org/wiki/Thermal_Sensors#ThinkPad_A31)
1: CPU
2: Main Battery: main sensor
3: Power Converter
4: Bay Battery: main sensor
5: MCH (northbridge)
6: PCMCIA/ambient
7: Main Battery: secondary sensor
8: Bay Battery: secondary sensor
EXPERIMENTAL: Embedded controller register dump -- /proc/acpi/ibm/ecdump
------------------------------------------------------------------------
This feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because the implementation
directly accesses hardware registers and may not work as expected. USE
WITH CAUTION! To use this feature, you need to supply the
experimental=1 parameter when loading the module.
This feature dumps the values of 256 embedded controller
registers. Values which have changed since the last time the registers
were dumped are marked with a star:
[root@x40 ibm-acpi]# cat /proc/acpi/ibm/ecdump
EC +00 +01 +02 +03 +04 +05 +06 +07 +08 +09 +0a +0b +0c +0d +0e +0f
EC 0x00: a7 47 87 01 fe 96 00 08 01 00 cb 00 00 00 40 00
EC 0x10: 00 00 ff ff f4 3c 87 09 01 ff 42 01 ff ff 0d 00
EC 0x20: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 43 00 00 80
EC 0x30: 01 07 1a 00 30 04 00 00 *85 00 00 10 00 50 00 00
EC 0x40: 00 00 00 00 00 00 14 01 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0x50: 00 c0 02 0d 00 01 01 02 02 03 03 03 03 *bc *02 *bc
EC 0x60: *02 *bc *02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0x70: 00 00 00 00 00 12 30 40 *24 *26 *2c *27 *20 80 *1f 80
EC 0x80: 00 00 00 06 *37 *0e 03 00 00 00 0e 07 00 00 00 00
EC 0x90: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0xa0: *ff 09 ff 09 ff ff *64 00 *00 *00 *a2 41 *ff *ff *e0 00
EC 0xb0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0xc0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0xd0: 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0xe0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 11 20 49 04 24 06 55 03
EC 0xf0: 31 55 48 54 35 38 57 57 08 2f 45 73 07 65 6c 1a
This feature can be used to determine the register holding the fan
speed on some models. To do that, do the following:
- make sure the battery is fully charged
- make sure the fan is running
- run 'cat /proc/acpi/ibm/ecdump' several times, once per second or so
The first step makes sure various charging-related values don't
vary. The second ensures that the fan-related values do vary, since
the fan speed fluctuates a bit. The third will (hopefully) mark the
fan register with a star:
[root@x40 ibm-acpi]# cat /proc/acpi/ibm/ecdump
EC +00 +01 +02 +03 +04 +05 +06 +07 +08 +09 +0a +0b +0c +0d +0e +0f
EC 0x00: a7 47 87 01 fe 96 00 08 01 00 cb 00 00 00 40 00
EC 0x10: 00 00 ff ff f4 3c 87 09 01 ff 42 01 ff ff 0d 00
EC 0x20: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 43 00 00 80
EC 0x30: 01 07 1a 00 30 04 00 00 85 00 00 10 00 50 00 00
EC 0x40: 00 00 00 00 00 00 14 01 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0x50: 00 c0 02 0d 00 01 01 02 02 03 03 03 03 bc 02 bc
EC 0x60: 02 bc 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0x70: 00 00 00 00 00 12 30 40 24 27 2c 27 21 80 1f 80
EC 0x80: 00 00 00 06 *be 0d 03 00 00 00 0e 07 00 00 00 00
EC 0x90: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0xa0: ff 09 ff 09 ff ff 64 00 00 00 a2 41 ff ff e0 00
EC 0xb0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0xc0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0xd0: 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0xe0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 11 20 49 04 24 06 55 03
EC 0xf0: 31 55 48 54 35 38 57 57 08 2f 45 73 07 65 6c 1a
Another set of values that varies often is the temperature
readings. Since temperatures don't change vary fast, you can take
several quick dumps to eliminate them.
You can use a similar method to figure out the meaning of other
embedded controller registers - e.g. make sure nothing else changes
except the charging or discharging battery to determine which
registers contain the current battery capacity, etc. If you experiment
with this, do send me your results (including some complete dumps with
a description of the conditions when they were taken.)
LCD brightness control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/brightness
---------------------------------------------------
This feature allows software control of the LCD brightness on ThinkPad
models which don't have a hardware brightness slider. The available
commands are:
echo up >/proc/acpi/ibm/brightness
echo down >/proc/acpi/ibm/brightness
echo 'level <level>' >/proc/acpi/ibm/brightness
The <level> number range is 0 to 7, although not all of them may be
distinct. The current brightness level is shown in the file.
Volume control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/volume
---------------------------------------
This feature allows volume control on ThinkPad models which don't have
a hardware volume knob. The available commands are:
echo up >/proc/acpi/ibm/volume
echo down >/proc/acpi/ibm/volume
echo mute >/proc/acpi/ibm/volume
echo 'level <level>' >/proc/acpi/ibm/volume
The <level> number range is 0 to 15 although not all of them may be
distinct. The unmute the volume after the mute command, use either the
up or down command (the level command will not unmute the volume).
The current volume level and mute state is shown in the file.
EXPERIMENTAL: fan speed, fan enable/disable -- /proc/acpi/ibm/fan
-----------------------------------------------------------------
This feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because the implementation
directly accesses hardware registers and may not work as expected. USE
WITH CAUTION! To use this feature, you need to supply the
experimental=1 parameter when loading the module.
This feature attempts to show the current fan speed, control mode and
other fan data that might be available. The speed is read directly
from the hardware registers of the embedded controller. This is known
to work on later R, T and X series ThinkPads but may show a bogus
value on other models.
Most ThinkPad fans work in "levels". Level 0 stops the fan. The higher
the level, the higher the fan speed, although adjacent levels often map
to the same fan speed. 7 is the highest level, where the fan reaches
the maximum recommended speed. Level "auto" means the EC changes the
fan level according to some internal algorithm, usually based on
readings from the thermal sensors. Level "disengaged" means the EC
disables the speed-locked closed-loop fan control, and drives the fan as
fast as it can go, which might exceed hardware limits, so use this level
with caution.
The fan usually ramps up or down slowly from one speed to another,
and it is normal for the EC to take several seconds to react to fan
commands.
The fan may be enabled or disabled with the following commands:
echo enable >/proc/acpi/ibm/fan
echo disable >/proc/acpi/ibm/fan
Placing a fan on level 0 is the same as disabling it. Enabling a fan
will try to place it in a safe level if it is too slow or disabled.
WARNING WARNING WARNING: do not leave the fan disabled unless you are
monitoring all of the temperature sensor readings and you are ready to
enable it if necessary to avoid overheating.
An enabled fan in level "auto" may stop spinning if the EC decides the
ThinkPad is cool enough and doesn't need the extra airflow. This is
normal, and the EC will spin the fan up if the varios thermal readings
rise too much.
On the X40, this seems to depend on the CPU and HDD temperatures.
Specifically, the fan is turned on when either the CPU temperature
climbs to 56 degrees or the HDD temperature climbs to 46 degrees. The
fan is turned off when the CPU temperature drops to 49 degrees and the
HDD temperature drops to 41 degrees. These thresholds cannot
currently be controlled.
The fan level can be controlled with the command:
echo 'level <level>' > /proc/acpi/ibm/thermal
Where <level> is an integer from 0 to 7, or one of the words "auto"
or "disengaged" (without the quotes). Not all ThinkPads support the
"auto" and "disengaged" levels.
On the X31 and X40 (and ONLY on those models), the fan speed can be
controlled to a certain degree. Once the fan is running, it can be
forced to run faster or slower with the following command:
echo 'speed <speed>' > /proc/acpi/ibm/thermal
The sustainable range of fan speeds on the X40 appears to be from
about 3700 to about 7350. Values outside this range either do not have
any effect or the fan speed eventually settles somewhere in that
range. The fan cannot be stopped or started with this command.
The ThinkPad's ACPI DSDT code will reprogram the fan on its own when
certain conditions are met. It will override any fan programming done
through ibm-acpi.
EXPERIMENTAL: WAN -- /proc/acpi/ibm/wan
---------------------------------------
This feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because the implementation
directly accesses hardware registers and may not work as expected. USE
WITH CAUTION! To use this feature, you need to supply the
experimental=1 parameter when loading the module.
This feature shows the presence and current state of a WAN (Sierra
Wireless EV-DO) device. If WAN is installed, the following commands can
be used:
echo enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/wan
echo disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/wan
It was tested on a Lenovo Thinkpad X60. It should probably work on other
Thinkpad models which come with this module installed.
Multiple Commands, Module Parameters
------------------------------------
Multiple commands can be written to the proc files in one shot by
separating them with commas, for example:
echo enable,0xffff > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey
echo lcd_disable,crt_enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
Commands can also be specified when loading the ibm_acpi module, for
example:
modprobe ibm_acpi hotkey=enable,0xffff video=auto_disable
The ibm-acpi kernel driver can be programmed to revert the fan level
to a safe setting if userspace does not issue one of the fan commands:
"enable", "disable", "level" or "watchdog" within a configurable
ammount of time. To do this, use the "watchdog" command.
echo 'watchdog <interval>' > /proc/acpi/ibm/fan
Interval is the ammount of time in seconds to wait for one of the
above mentioned fan commands before reseting the fan level to a safe
one. If set to zero, the watchdog is disabled (default). When the
watchdog timer runs out, it does the exact equivalent of the "enable"
fan command.
Note that the watchdog timer stops after it enables the fan. It will
be rearmed again automatically (using the same interval) when one of
the above mentioned fan commands is received. The fan watchdog is,
therefore, not suitable to protect against fan mode changes made
through means other than the "enable", "disable", and "level" fan
commands.
Example Configuration
---------------------
The ACPI support in the kernel is intended to be used in conjunction
with a user-space daemon, acpid. The configuration files for this
daemon control what actions are taken in response to various ACPI
events. An example set of configuration files are included in the
config/ directory of the tarball package available on the web
site. Note that these are provided for illustration purposes only and
may need to be adapted to your particular setup.
The following utility scripts are used by the example action
scripts (included with ibm-acpi for completeness):
/usr/local/sbin/idectl -- from the hdparm source distribution,
see http://www.ibiblio.org/pub/Linux/system/hardware
/usr/local/sbin/laptop_mode -- from the Linux kernel source
distribution, see Documentation/laptop-mode.txt
/sbin/service -- comes with Redhat/Fedora distributions
/usr/sbin/hibernate -- from the Software Suspend 2 distribution,
see http://softwaresuspend.berlios.de/
Toan T Nguyen <ntt@physics.ucla.edu> notes that Suse uses the
powersave program to suspend ('powersave --suspend-to-ram') or
hibernate ('powersave --suspend-to-disk'). This means that the
hibernate script is not needed on that distribution.
Henrik Brix Andersen <brix@gentoo.org> has written a Gentoo ACPI event
handler script for the X31. You can get the latest version from
http://dev.gentoo.org/~brix/files/x31.sh
David Schweikert <dws@ee.eth.ch> has written an alternative blank.sh
script which works on Debian systems. This scripts has now been
extended to also work on Fedora systems and included as the default
blank.sh in the distribution.

27
Documentation/ide.txt
View File

@ -233,6 +233,8 @@ Summary of ide driver parameters for kernel command line
"hdx=remap63" : remap the drive: add 63 to all sector numbers
(for DM OnTrack)
"idex=noautotune" : driver will NOT attempt to tune interface speed
"hdx=autotune" : driver will attempt to tune interface speed
to the fastest PIO mode supported,
if possible for this drive only.
@ -268,17 +270,6 @@ Summary of ide driver parameters for kernel command line
"idex=base,ctl,irq" : specify base, ctl, and irq number
"idex=autotune" : driver will attempt to tune interface speed
to the fastest PIO mode supported,
for all drives on this interface.
Not fully supported by all chipset types,
and quite likely to cause trouble with
older/odd IDE drives.
"idex=noautotune" : driver will NOT attempt to tune interface speed
This is the default for most chipsets,
except the cmd640.
"idex=serialize" : do not overlap operations on idex. Please note
that you will have to specify this option for
both the respective primary and secondary channel
@ -303,13 +294,8 @@ The following are valid ONLY on ide0, which usually corresponds
to the first ATA interface found on the particular host, and the defaults for
the base,ctl ports must not be altered.
"ide0=dtc2278" : probe/support DTC2278 interface
"ide0=ht6560b" : probe/support HT6560B interface
"ide0=cmd640_vlb" : *REQUIRED* for VLB cards with the CMD640 chip
(not for PCI -- automatically detected)
"ide0=qd65xx" : probe/support qd65xx interface
"ide0=ali14xx" : probe/support ali14xx chipsets (ALI M1439/M1443/M1445)
"ide0=umc8672" : probe/support umc8672 chipsets
"ide=doubler" : probe/support IDE doublers on Amiga
@ -317,6 +303,15 @@ There may be more options than shown -- use the source, Luke!
Everything else is rejected with a "BAD OPTION" message.
For legacy IDE VLB host drivers (ali14xx/dtc2278/ht6560b/qd65xx/umc8672)
you need to explicitly enable probing by using "probe" kernel parameter,
i.e. to enable probing for ALI M14xx chipsets (ali14xx host driver) use:
* "ali14xx.probe" boot option when ali14xx driver is built-in the kernel
* "probe" module parameter when ali14xx driver is compiled as module
("modprobe ali14xx probe")
================================================================================
IDE ATAPI streaming tape driver

8
Documentation/infiniband/user_mad.txt
View File

@ -91,6 +91,14 @@ Sending MADs
if (ret != sizeof *mad + mad_length)
perror("write");
Transaction IDs
Users of the umad devices can use the lower 32 bits of the
transaction ID field (that is, the least significant half of the
field in network byte order) in MADs being sent to match
request/response pairs. The upper 32 bits are reserved for use by
the kernel and will be overwritten before a MAD is sent.
Setting IsSM Capability Bit
To set the IsSM capability bit for a port, simply open the

26
Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt
View File

@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ This document describes the Linux kernel Makefiles.
--- 6.1 Set variables to tweak the build to the architecture
--- 6.2 Add prerequisites to archprepare:
--- 6.3 List directories to visit when descending
--- 6.4 Architecture specific boot images
--- 6.4 Architecture-specific boot images
--- 6.5 Building non-kbuild targets
--- 6.6 Commands useful for building a boot image
--- 6.7 Custom kbuild commands
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ more details, with real examples.
Example:
obj-y += foo.o
This tell kbuild that there is one object in that directory, named
This tells kbuild that there is one object in that directory, named
foo.o. foo.o will be built from foo.c or foo.S.
If foo.o shall be built as a module, the variable obj-m is used.
@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ more details, with real examples.
Special rules are used when the kbuild infrastructure does
not provide the required support. A typical example is
header files generated during the build process.
Another example are the architecture specific Makefiles which
Another example are the architecture-specific Makefiles which
need special rules to prepare boot images etc.
Special rules are written as normal Make rules.
@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ more details, with real examples.
#arch/i386/kernel/Makefile
vsyscall-flags += $(call ld-option, -Wl$(comma)--hash-style=sysv)
In the above example vsyscall-flags will be assigned the option
In the above example, vsyscall-flags will be assigned the option
-Wl$(comma)--hash-style=sysv if it is supported by $(CC).
The second argument is optional, and if supplied will be used
if first argument is not supported.
@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ more details, with real examples.
#arch/i386/Makefile
cflags-y += $(call cc-option,-march=pentium-mmx,-march=i586)
In the above example cflags-y will be assigned the option
In the above example, cflags-y will be assigned the option
-march=pentium-mmx if supported by $(CC), otherwise -march=i586.
The second argument to cc-option is optional, and if omitted,
cflags-y will be assigned no value if first option is not supported.
@ -750,7 +750,7 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
located at the root of the obj tree.
The very first objects linked are listed in head-y, assigned by
arch/$(ARCH)/Makefile.
7) Finally, the architecture specific part does any required post processing
7) Finally, the architecture-specific part does any required post processing
and builds the final bootimage.
- This includes building boot records
- Preparing initrd images and the like
@ -880,7 +880,7 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
$(head-y) lists objects to be linked first in vmlinux.
$(libs-y) lists directories where a lib.a archive can be located.
The rest lists directories where a built-in.o object file can be
The rest list directories where a built-in.o object file can be
located.
$(init-y) objects will be located after $(head-y).
@ -888,7 +888,7 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
$(core-y), $(libs-y), $(drivers-y) and $(net-y).
The top level Makefile defines values for all generic directories,
and arch/$(ARCH)/Makefile only adds architecture specific directories.
and arch/$(ARCH)/Makefile only adds architecture-specific directories.
Example:
#arch/sparc64/Makefile
@ -897,7 +897,7 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
drivers-$(CONFIG_OPROFILE) += arch/sparc64/oprofile/
--- 6.4 Architecture specific boot images
--- 6.4 Architecture-specific boot images
An arch Makefile specifies goals that take the vmlinux file, compress
it, wrap it in bootstrapping code, and copy the resulting files
@ -924,7 +924,7 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
"$(Q)$(MAKE) $(build)=<dir>" is the recommended way to invoke
make in a subdirectory.
There are no rules for naming architecture specific targets,
There are no rules for naming architecture-specific targets,
but executing "make help" will list all relevant targets.
To support this, $(archhelp) must be defined.
@ -982,7 +982,7 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
$(call if_changed,ld/objcopy/gzip)
When the rule is evaluated, it is checked to see if any files
needs an update, or the command line has changed since the last
need an update, or the command line has changed since the last
invocation. The latter will force a rebuild if any options
to the executable have changed.
Any target that utilises if_changed must be listed in $(targets),
@ -1089,7 +1089,7 @@ When kbuild executes, the following steps are followed (roughly):
assignment.
The kbuild infrastructure for *lds file are used in several
architecture specific files.
architecture-specific files.
=== 7 Kbuild Variables
@ -1133,7 +1133,7 @@ The top Makefile exports the following variables:
This variable defines a place for the arch Makefiles to install
the resident kernel image and System.map file.
Use this for architecture specific install targets.
Use this for architecture-specific install targets.
INSTALL_MOD_PATH, MODLIB

24
Documentation/kdump/kdump.txt
View File

@ -30,6 +30,10 @@ On x86 machines, the first 640 KB of physical memory is needed to boot,
regardless of where the kernel loads. Therefore, kexec backs up this
region just before rebooting into the dump-capture kernel.
Similarly on PPC64 machines first 32KB of physical memory is needed for
booting regardless of where the kernel is loaded and to support 64K page
size kexec backs up the first 64KB memory.
All of the necessary information about the system kernel's core image is
encoded in the ELF format, and stored in a reserved area of memory
before a crash. The physical address of the start of the ELF header is
@ -224,7 +228,7 @@ Dump-capture kernel config options (Arch Dependent, x86_64)
Dump-capture kernel config options (Arch Dependent, ppc64)
----------------------------------------------------------
- Make and install the kernel and its modules. DO NOT add this kernel
* Make and install the kernel and its modules. DO NOT add this kernel
to the boot loader configuration files.
Dump-capture kernel config options (Arch Dependent, ia64)
@ -251,8 +255,8 @@ Dump-capture kernel config options (Arch Dependent, ia64)
Boot into System Kernel
=======================
1) Make and install the kernel and its modules. Update the boot loader
(such as grub, yaboot, or lilo) configuration files as necessary.
1) Update the boot loader (such as grub, yaboot, or lilo) configuration
files as necessary.
2) Boot the system kernel with the boot parameter "crashkernel=Y@X",
where Y specifies how much memory to reserve for the dump-capture kernel
@ -356,10 +360,11 @@ If die() is called, and it happens to be a thread with pid 0 or 1, or die()
is called inside interrupt context or die() is called and panic_on_oops is set,
the system will boot into the dump-capture kernel.
On powererpc systems when a soft-reset is generated, die() is called by all cpus and the system will boot into the dump-capture kernel.
On powererpc systems when a soft-reset is generated, die() is called by all cpus
and the system will boot into the dump-capture kernel.
For testing purposes, you can trigger a crash by using "ALT-SysRq-c",
"echo c > /proc/sysrq-trigger or write a module to force the panic.
"echo c > /proc/sysrq-trigger" or write a module to force the panic.
Write Out the Dump File
=======================
@ -410,12 +415,9 @@ format. Crash is available on Dave Anderson's site at the following URL:
To Do
=====
1) Provide a kernel pages filtering mechanism, so core file size is not
extreme on systems with huge memory banks.
2) Relocatable kernel can help in maintaining multiple kernels for
crash_dump, and the same kernel as the system kernel can be used to
capture the dump.
1) Provide relocatable kernels for all architectures to help in maintaining
multiple kernels for crash_dump, and the same kernel as the system kernel
can be used to capture the dump.
Contact

143
Documentation/kernel-docs.txt
View File

@ -62,16 +62,16 @@
Alpha AXP Processor, C.-Useful Web and FTP Sites, D.-The GNU
General Public License, Glossary". In short: a must have.
* Title: "The Linux Kernel Hackers' Guide"
Author: Michael K.Johnson and others.
URL: http://www.tldp.org/LDP/khg/HyperNews/get/khg.html
Keywords: everything!
Description: No more Postscript book-like version. Only HTML now.
Many people have contributed. The interface is similar to web
available mailing lists archives. You can find some articles and
then some mails asking questions about them and/or complementing
previous contributions. A little bit anarchic in this aspect, but
with some valuable information in some cases.
* Title: "Linux Device Drivers, 2nd Edition"
Author: Alessandro Rubini and Jonathan Corbet.
URL: http://www.xml.com/ldd/chapter/book/index.html
Keywords: device drivers, modules, debugging, memory, hardware,
interrupt handling, char drivers, block drivers, kmod, mmap, DMA,
buses.
Description: O'Reilly's popular book, now also on-line under the
GNU Free Documentation License.
Notes: You can also buy it in paper-form from O'Reilly. See below
under BOOKS (Not on-line).
* Title: "Conceptual Architecture of the Linux Kernel"
Author: Ivan T. Bowman.
@ -85,9 +85,9 @@
* Title: "Concrete Architecture of the Linux Kernel"
Author: Ivan T. Bowman, Saheem Siddiqi, and Meyer C. Tanuan.
URL: http://plg.uwaterloo.ca/~itbowman/papers/CS746G-a2.html
Keywords: concrete arquitecture, extracted design, reverse
Keywords: concrete architecture, extracted design, reverse
engineering, system structure, dependencies.
Description: Concrete arquitecture of the Linux kernel,
Description: Concrete architecture of the Linux kernel,
automatically extracted from the source code. Very detailed. Good
figures. Gives good overall kernel understanding. This papers
focus on lower details than its predecessor (files, variables...).
@ -114,7 +114,7 @@
* Title: "The Linux RAID-1, 4, 5 Code"
Author: Ingo Molnar, Gadi Oxman and Miguel de Icaza.
URL: http://www2.linuxjournal.com/lj-issues/issue44/2391.html
URL: http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=2391
Keywords: RAID, MD driver.
Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is it's
abstract: "A description of the implementation of the RAID-1,
@ -124,7 +124,7 @@
* Title: "Dynamic Kernels: Modularized Device Drivers"
Author: Alessandro Rubini.
URL: http://www2.linuxjournal.com/lj-issues/issue23/1219.html
URL: http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=1219
Keywords: device driver, module, loading/unloading modules,
allocating resources.
Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is it's
@ -137,7 +137,7 @@
* Title: "Dynamic Kernels: Discovery"
Author: Alessandro Rubini.
URL: http://www2.linuxjournal.com/lj-issues/issue24/1220.html
URL: http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=1220
Keywords: character driver, init_module, clean_up module,
autodetection, mayor number, minor number, file operations,
open(), close().
@ -149,7 +149,7 @@
* Title: "The Devil's in the Details"
Author: Georg v. Zezschwitz and Alessandro Rubini.
URL: http://www2.linuxjournal.com/lj-issues/issue25/1221.html
URL: http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=1221
Keywords: read(), write(), select(), ioctl(), blocking/non
blocking mode, interrupt handler.
Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is it's
@ -159,7 +159,7 @@
* Title: "Dissecting Interrupts and Browsing DMA"
Author: Alessandro Rubini and Georg v. Zezschwitz.
URL: http://www2.linuxjournal.com/lj-issues/issue26/1222.html
URL: http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=1222
Keywords: interrupts, irqs, DMA, bottom halves, task queues.
Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is it's
abstract: "This is the fourth in a series of articles about
@ -173,7 +173,7 @@
* Title: "Device Drivers Concluded"
Author: Georg v. Zezschwitz.
URL: http://www2.linuxjournal.com/lj-issues/issue28/1287.html
URL: http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=1287
Keywords: address spaces, pages, pagination, page management,
demand loading, swapping, memory protection, memory mapping, mmap,
virtual memory areas (VMAs), vremap, PCI.
@ -185,7 +185,7 @@
* Title: "Network Buffers And Memory Management"
Author: Alan Cox.
URL: http://www2.linuxjournal.com/lj-issues/issue30/1312.html
URL: http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=1312
Keywords: sk_buffs, network devices, protocol/link layer
variables, network devices flags, transmit, receive,
configuration, multicast.
@ -218,8 +218,7 @@
* Title: "Programming PCI-Devices under Linux"
Author: Claus Schroeter.
URL:
ftp://ftp.llp.fu-berlin.de/pub/linux/LINUX-LAB/whitepapers/pcip.ps
.gz
ftp://ftp.llp.fu-berlin.de/pub/linux/LINUX-LAB/whitepapers/pcip.ps.gz
Keywords: PCI, device, busmastering.
Description: 6 pages tutorial on PCI programming under Linux.
Gives the basic concepts on the architecture of the PCI subsystem,
@ -229,8 +228,7 @@
* Title: "Writing Character Device Driver for Linux"
Author: R. Baruch and C. Schroeter.
URL:
ftp://ftp.llp.fu-berlin.de/pub/linux/LINUX-LAB/whitepapers/drivers
.ps.gz
ftp://ftp.llp.fu-berlin.de/pub/linux/LINUX-LAB/whitepapers/drivers.ps.gz
Keywords: character device drivers, I/O, signals, DMA, accessing
ports in user space, kernel environment.
Description: 68 pages paper on writing character drivers. A little
@ -252,7 +250,7 @@
* Title: "Analysis of the Ext2fs structure"
Author: Louis-Dominique Dubeau.
URL: http://step.polymtl.ca/~ldd/ext2fs/ext2fs_toc.html
URL: http://www.nondot.org/sabre/os/files/FileSystems/ext2fs/
Keywords: ext2, filesystem, ext2fs.
Description: Description of ext2's blocks, directories, inodes,
bitmaps, invariants...
@ -346,16 +344,6 @@
published, printed or used in excerpts without explicit permission
of the author". Fortunately, it may still be read...
* Title: "Tour Of the Linux Kernel Source"
Author: Vijo Cherian.
URL: http://www.geocities.com/vijoc/tolks/tolks.html
Keywords: .
Description: A classic of this page! Was lost for a while and is
back again. Thanks Vijo! TOLKS: the name says it all. A tour of
the sources, describing directories, files, variables, data
structures... It covers general stuff, device drivers,
filesystems, IPC and Networking Code.
* Title: "Linux Kernel Mailing List Glossary"
Author: various
URL: http://kernelnewbies.org/glossary/
@ -378,6 +366,16 @@
different". Freely redistributable under the conditions of the GNU
General Public License.
* Title: "Global spinlock list and usage"
Author: Rick Lindsley.
URL: http://lse.sourceforge.net/lockhier/global-spin-lock
Keywords: spinlock.
Description: This is an attempt to document both the existence and
usage of the spinlocks in the Linux 2.4.5 kernel. Comprehensive
list of spinlocks showing when they are used, which functions
access them, how each lock is acquired, under what conditions it
is held, whether interrupts can occur or not while it is held...
* Title: "Porting Linux 2.0 Drivers To Linux 2.2: Changes and New
Features "
Author: Alan Cox.
@ -460,9 +458,7 @@
* Title: "Linux IP Networking. A Guide to the Implementation and
Modification of the Linux Protocol Stack."
Author: Glenn Herrin.
URL:
http://kernelnewbies.org/documents/ipnetworking/linuxipnetworking.
html
URL: http://www.cs.unh.edu/cnrg/gherrin
Keywords: network, networking, protocol, IP, UDP, TCP, connection,
socket, receiving, transmitting, forwarding, routing, packets,
modules, /proc, sk_buff, FIB, tags.
@ -592,21 +588,6 @@
ISBN: 2-212-08932-5
Notes: French.
* Title: "The Linux Kernel Book"
Author: Remy Card, Eric Dumas, Franck Mevel.
Publisher: John Wiley & Sons.
Date: 1998.
ISBN: 0-471-98141-9
Notes: English translation.
* Title: "Linux 2.0"
Author: Remy Card, Eric Dumas, Franck Mevel.
Publisher: Gestión 2000.
Date: 1997.
Pages: 501.
ISBN: 8-480-88208-5
Notes: Spanish translation.
* Title: "Unix internals -- the new frontiers"
Author: Uresh Vahalia.
Publisher: Prentice Hall.
@ -614,23 +595,13 @@
Pages: 600.
ISBN: 0-13-101908-2
* Title: "Linux Core Kernel Commentary. Guide to Insider's Knowledge
on the Core Kernel of the Linux Code"
Author: Scott Maxwell.
Publisher: Coriolis.
Date: 1999.
Pages: 592.
ISBN: 1-57610-469-9
Notes: CD-ROM included. Line by line commentary of the kernel
code.
* Title: "Linux IP Stacks Commentary"
Author: Stephen Satchell and HBJ Clifford.
Publisher: Coriolis.
Date: 2000.
Pages: ???.
ISBN: 1-57610-470-2
Notes: Line by line source code commentary book.
* Title: "The Design and Implementation of the 4.4 BSD UNIX
Operating System"
Author: Marshall Kirk McKusick, Keith Bostic, Michael J. Karels,
John S. Quarterman.
Publisher: Addison-Wesley.
Date: 1996.
ISBN: 0-201-54979-4
* Title: "Programming for the real world - POSIX.4"
Author: Bill O. Gallmeister.
@ -641,14 +612,28 @@
Notes: Though not being directly about Linux, Linux aims to be
POSIX. Good reference.
* Title: "Understanding the Linux Kernel"
Author: Daniel P. Bovet and Marco Cesati.
Publisher: O'Reilly & Associates, Inc..
Date: 2000.
Pages: 702.
ISBN: 0-596-00002-2
Notes: Further information in
http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/linuxkernel/
* Title: "UNIX Systems for Modern Architectures: Symmetric
Multiprocesssing and Caching for Kernel Programmers"
Author: Curt Schimmel.
Publisher: Addison Wesley.
Date: June, 1994.
Pages: 432.
ISBN: 0-201-63338-8
* Title: "The Design and Implementation of the 4.3 BSD UNIX
Operating System"
Author: Samuel J. Leffler, Marshall Kirk McKusick, Michael J.
Karels, John S. Quarterman.
Publisher: Addison-Wesley.
Date: 1989 (reprinted with corrections on October, 1990).
ISBN: 0-201-06196-1
* Title: "The Design of the UNIX Operating System"
Author: Maurice J. Bach.
Publisher: Prentice Hall.
Date: 1986.
Pages: 471.
ISBN: 0-13-201757-1
MISCELLANEOUS:
@ -697,7 +682,7 @@
produced during the week. Published every Thursday.
* Name: "Kernel Traffic"
URL: http://www.kerneltraffic.org/kernel-traffic/
URL: http://kt.zork.net/kernel-traffic/
Keywords: linux-kernel mailing list, weekly kernel news.
Description: Weekly newsletter covering the most relevant
discussions of the linux-kernel mailing list.
@ -730,7 +715,7 @@
* Name: "Gary's Encyclopedia - The Linux Kernel"
Author: Gary (I suppose...).
URL: http://members.aa.net/~swear/pedia/kernel.html
URL: http://www.lisoleg.net/cgi-bin/lisoleg.pl?view=kernel.htm
Keywords: links, not found here?.
Description: Gary's Encyclopedia exists to allow the rapid finding
of documentation and other information of interest to GNU/Linux

92
Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
View File

@ -48,6 +48,7 @@ parameter is applicable:
ISAPNP ISA PnP code is enabled.
ISDN Appropriate ISDN support is enabled.
JOY Appropriate joystick support is enabled.
LIBATA Libata driver is enabled
LP Printer support is enabled.
LOOP Loopback device support is enabled.
M68k M68k architecture is enabled.
@ -78,6 +79,7 @@ parameter is applicable:
Documentation/scsi/.
SELINUX SELinux support is enabled.
SERIAL Serial support is enabled.
SH SuperH architecture is enabled.
SMP The kernel is an SMP kernel.
SPARC Sparc architecture is enabled.
SWSUSP Software suspend is enabled.
@ -124,7 +126,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
See header of drivers/scsi/53c7xx.c.
See also Documentation/scsi/ncr53c7xx.txt.
acpi= [HW,ACPI] Advanced Configuration and Power Interface
acpi= [HW,ACPI,X86-64,i386]
Advanced Configuration and Power Interface
Format: { force | off | ht | strict | noirq }
force -- enable ACPI if default was off
off -- disable ACPI if default was on
@ -135,6 +138,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
See also Documentation/pm.txt, pci=noacpi
acpi_apic_instance= [ACPI, IOAPIC]
Format: <int>
2: use 2nd APIC table, if available
1,0: use 1st APIC table
default: 0
acpi_sleep= [HW,ACPI] Sleep options
Format: { s3_bios, s3_mode }
See Documentation/power/video.txt
@ -172,19 +181,41 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
that require a timer override, but don't have
HPET
acpi_dbg_layer= [HW,ACPI]
acpi.debug_layer= [HW,ACPI]
Format: <int>
Each bit of the <int> indicates an ACPI debug layer,
1: enable, 0: disable. It is useful for boot time
debugging. After system has booted up, it can be set
via /proc/acpi/debug_layer.
via /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_layer.
CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUG must be enabled for this to produce any output.
Available bits (add the numbers together) to enable debug output
for specific parts of the ACPI subsystem:
0x01 utilities 0x02 hardware 0x04 events 0x08 tables
0x10 namespace 0x20 parser 0x40 dispatcher
0x80 executer 0x100 resources 0x200 acpica debugger
0x400 os services 0x800 acpica disassembler.
The number can be in decimal or prefixed with 0x in hex.
Warning: Many of these options can produce a lot of
output and make your system unusable. Be very careful.
acpi_dbg_level= [HW,ACPI]
acpi.debug_level= [HW,ACPI]
Format: <int>
Each bit of the <int> indicates an ACPI debug level,
1: enable, 0: disable. It is useful for boot time
debugging. After system has booted up, it can be set
via /proc/acpi/debug_level.
via /sys/module/acpi/parameters/debug_level.
CONFIG_ACPI_DEBUG must be enabled for this to produce any output.
Available bits (add the numbers together) to enable different
debug output levels of the ACPI subsystem:
0x01 error 0x02 warn 0x04 init 0x08 debug object
0x10 info 0x20 init names 0x40 parse 0x80 load
0x100 dispatch 0x200 execute 0x400 names 0x800 operation region
0x1000 bfield 0x2000 tables 0x4000 values 0x8000 objects
0x10000 resources 0x20000 user requests 0x40000 package.
The number can be in decimal or prefixed with 0x in hex.
Warning: Many of these options can produce a lot of
output and make your system unusable. Be very careful.
acpi_fake_ecdt [HW,ACPI] Workaround failure due to BIOS lacking ECDT
@ -484,7 +515,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
dtc3181e= [HW,SCSI]
earlyprintk= [IA-32,X86-64]
earlyprintk= [IA-32,X86-64,SH]
earlyprintk=vga
earlyprintk=serial[,ttySn[,baudrate]]
@ -771,6 +802,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
lapic [IA-32,APIC] Enable the local APIC even if BIOS
disabled it.
lapic_timer_c2_ok [IA-32,x86-64,APIC] trust the local apic timer in
C2 power state.
lasi= [HW,SCSI] PARISC LASI driver for the 53c700 chip
Format: addr:<io>,irq:<irq>
@ -863,7 +897,14 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
Format: <1-256>
maxcpus= [SMP] Maximum number of processors that an SMP kernel
should make use of
should make use of.
Using "nosmp" or "maxcpus=0" will disable SMP
entirely (the MPS table probe still happens, though).
A command-line option of "maxcpus=<NUM>", where <NUM>
is an integer greater than 0, limits the maximum number
of CPUs activated in SMP mode to <NUM>.
Using "maxcpus=1" on an SMP kernel is the trivial
case of an SMP kernel with only one CPU.
max_addr=[KMG] [KNL,BOOT,ia64] All physical memory greater than or
equal to this physical address is ignored.
@ -1038,6 +1079,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
emulation library even if a 387 maths coprocessor
is present.
noacpi [LIBATA] Disables use of ACPI in libata suspend/resume
when set.
Format: <int>
noaliencache [MM, NUMA] Disables the allcoation of alien caches in
the slab allocator. Saves per-node memory, but will
impact performance on real NUMA hardware.
@ -1103,6 +1148,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
nolapic [IA-32,APIC] Do not enable or use the local APIC.
nolapic_timer [IA-32,APIC] Do not use the local APIC timer.
noltlbs [PPC] Do not use large page/tlb entries for kernel
lowmem mapping on PPC40x.
@ -1275,6 +1322,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
This sorting is done to get a device
order compatible with older (<= 2.4) kernels.
nobfsort Don't sort PCI devices into breadth-first order.
cbiosize=nn[KMG] The fixed amount of bus space which is
reserved for the CardBus bridge's IO window.
The default value is 256 bytes.
cbmemsize=nn[KMG] The fixed amount of bus space which is
reserved for the CardBus bridge's memory
window. The default value is 64 megabytes.
pcmv= [HW,PCMCIA] BadgePAD 4
@ -1667,6 +1720,22 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
stifb= [HW]
Format: bpp:<bpp1>[:<bpp2>[:<bpp3>...]]
sunrpc.pool_mode=
[NFS]
Control how the NFS server code allocates CPUs to
service thread pools. Depending on how many NICs
you have and where their interrupts are bound, this
option will affect which CPUs will do NFS serving.
Note: this parameter cannot be changed while the
NFS server is running.
auto the server chooses an appropriate mode
automatically using heuristics
global a single global pool contains all CPUs
percpu one pool for each CPU
pernode one pool for each NUMA node (equivalent
to global on non-NUMA machines)
swiotlb= [IA-64] Number of I/O TLB slabs
switches= [HW,M68k]
@ -1740,10 +1809,17 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
Note that genuine overcurrent events won't be
reported either.
usbcore.autosuspend=
[USB] The autosuspend time delay (in seconds) used
for newly-detected USB devices (default 2). This
is the time required before an idle device will be
autosuspended. Devices for which the delay is set
to a negative value won't be autosuspended at all.
usbhid.mousepoll=
[USBHID] The interval which mice are to be polled at.
vdso= [IA-32]
vdso= [IA-32,SH]
vdso=1: enable VDSO (default)
vdso=0: disable VDSO mapping

12
Documentation/keys.txt
View File

@ -859,6 +859,18 @@ payload contents" for more information.
void unregister_key_type(struct key_type *type);
Under some circumstances, it may be desirable to desirable to deal with a
bundle of keys. The facility provides access to the keyring type for managing
such a bundle:
struct key_type key_type_keyring;
This can be used with a function such as request_key() to find a specific
keyring in a process's keyrings. A keyring thus found can then be searched
with keyring_search(). Note that it is not possible to use request_key() to
search a specific keyring, so using keyrings in this way is of limited utility.
===================================
NOTES ON ACCESSING PAYLOAD CONTENTS
===================================

1
Documentation/magic-number.txt
View File

@ -65,7 +65,6 @@ CMAGIC 0x0111 user include/linux/a.out.h
MKISS_DRIVER_MAGIC 0x04bf mkiss_channel drivers/net/mkiss.h
RISCOM8_MAGIC 0x0907 riscom_port drivers/char/riscom8.h
SPECIALIX_MAGIC 0x0907 specialix_port drivers/char/specialix_io8.h
AURORA_MAGIC 0x0A18 Aurora_port drivers/sbus/char/aurora.h
HDLC_MAGIC 0x239e n_hdlc drivers/char/n_hdlc.c
APM_BIOS_MAGIC 0x4101 apm_user arch/i386/kernel/apm.c
CYCLADES_MAGIC 0x4359 cyclades_port include/linux/cyclades.h

18
Documentation/networking/ax25.txt
View File

@ -1,16 +1,10 @@
To use the amateur radio protocols within Linux you will need to get a
suitable copy of the AX.25 Utilities. More detailed information about these
and associated programs can be found on http://zone.pspt.fi/~jsn/.
For more information about the AX.25, NET/ROM and ROSE protocol stacks, see
the AX25-HOWTO written by Terry Dawson <terry@perf.no.itg.telstra.com.au>
who is also the AX.25 Utilities maintainer.
suitable copy of the AX.25 Utilities. More detailed information about
AX.25, NET/ROM and ROSE, associated programs and and utilities can be
found on http://www.linux-ax25.org.
There is an active mailing list for discussing Linux amateur radio matters
called linux-hams. To subscribe to it, send a message to
called linux-hams@vger.kernel.org. To subscribe to it, send a message to
majordomo@vger.kernel.org with the words "subscribe linux-hams" in the body
of the message, the subject field is ignored.
Jonathan G4KLX
g4klx@g4klx.demon.co.uk
of the message, the subject field is ignored. You don't need to be
subscribed to post but of course that means you might miss an answer.

103
Documentation/networking/bcm43xx.txt
View File

@ -2,35 +2,88 @@
BCM43xx Linux Driver Project
============================
About this software
-------------------
The goal of this project is to develop a linux driver for Broadcom
BCM43xx chips, based on the specification at
http://bcm-specs.sipsolutions.net/
The project page is http://bcm43xx.berlios.de/
Requirements
Introduction
------------
1) Linux Kernel 2.6.16 or later
http://www.kernel.org/
Many of the wireless devices found in modern notebook computers are
based on the wireless chips produced by Broadcom. These devices have
been a problem for Linux users as there is no open-source driver
available. In addition, Broadcom has not released specifications
for the device, and driver availability has been limited to the
binary-only form used in the GPL versions of AP hardware such as the
Linksys WRT54G, and the Windows and OS X drivers. Before this project
began, the only way to use these devices were to use the Windows or
OS X drivers with either the Linuxant or ndiswrapper modules. There
is a strong penalty if this method is used as loading the binary-only
module "taints" the kernel, and no kernel developer will help diagnose
any kernel problems.
You may want to configure your kernel with:
Development
-----------
CONFIG_DEBUG_FS (optional):
-> Kernel hacking
-> Debug Filesystem
This driver has been developed using
a clean-room technique that is described at
http://bcm-specs.sipsolutions.net/ReverseEngineeringProcess. For legal
reasons, none of the clean-room crew works on the on the Linux driver,
and none of the Linux developers sees anything but the specifications,
which are the ultimate product of the reverse-engineering group.
2) SoftMAC IEEE 802.11 Networking Stack extension and patched ieee80211
modules:
http://softmac.sipsolutions.net/
Software
--------
3) Firmware Files
Since the release of the 2.6.17 kernel, the bcm43xx driver has been
distributed with the kernel source, and is prebuilt in most, if not
all, distributions. There is, however, additional software that is
required. The firmware used by the chip is the intellectual property
of Broadcom and they have not given the bcm43xx team redistribution
rights to this firmware. Since we cannot legally redistribute
the firwmare we cannot include it with the driver. Furthermore, it
cannot be placed in the downloadable archives of any distributing
organization; therefore, the user is responsible for obtaining the
firmware and placing it in the appropriate location so that the driver
can find it when initializing.
Please try fwcutter. Fwcutter can extract the firmware from various
binary driver files. It supports driver files from Windows, MacOS and
Linux. You can get fwcutter from http://bcm43xx.berlios.de/.
Also, fwcutter comes with a README file for further instructions.
To help with this process, the bcm43xx developers provide a separate
program named bcm43xx-fwcutter to "cut" the firmware out of a
Windows or OS X driver and write the extracted files to the proper
location. This program is usually provided with the distribution;
however, it may be downloaded from
http://developer.berlios.de/project/showfiles.php?group_id=4547
The firmware is available in two versions. V3 firmware is used with
the in-kernel bcm43xx driver that uses a software MAC layer called
SoftMAC, and will have a microcode revision of 0x127 or smaller. The
V4 firmware is used by an out-of-kernel driver employing a variation of
the Devicescape MAC layer known as d80211. Once bcm43xx-d80211 reaches
a satisfactory level of development, it will replace bcm43xx-softmac
in the kernel as it is much more flexible and powerful.
A source for the latest V3 firmware is
http://downloads.openwrt.org/sources/wl_apsta-3.130.20.0.o
Once this file is downloaded, the command
'bcm43xx-fwcutter -w <dir> <filename>'
will extract the microcode and write it to directory
<dir>. The correct directory will depend on your distribution;
however, most use '/lib/firmware'. Once this step is completed,
the bcm3xx driver should load when the system is booted. To see
any messages relating to the driver, issue the command 'dmesg |
grep bcm43xx' from a terminal window. If there are any problems,
please send that output to Bcm43xx-dev@lists.berlios.de.
Although the driver has been in-kernel since 2.6.17, the earliest
version is quite limited in its capability. Patches that include
all features of later versions are available for the stable kernel
versions from 2.6.18. These will be needed if you use a BCM4318,
or a PCI Express version (BCM4311 and BCM4312). In addition, if you
have an early BCM4306 and more than 1 GB RAM, your kernel will need
to be patched. These patches, which are being updated regularly,
are available at ftp://lwfinger.dynalias.org/patches. Look for
combined_2.6.YY.patch. Of course you will need kernel source downloaded
from kernel.org, or the source from your distribution.
If you build your own kernel, please enable CONFIG_BCM43XX_DEBUG
and CONFIG_IEEE80211_SOFTMAC_DEBUG. The log information provided is
essential for solving any problems.

35
Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
View File

@ -920,40 +920,9 @@ options, you may wish to use the "max_bonds" module parameter,
documented above.
To create multiple bonding devices with differing options, it
is necessary to load the bonding driver multiple times. Note that
current versions of the sysconfig network initialization scripts
handle this automatically; if your distro uses these scripts, no
special action is needed. See the section Configuring Bonding
Devices, above, if you're not sure about your network initialization
scripts.
is necessary to use bonding parameters exported by sysfs, documented
in the section below.
To load multiple instances of the module, it is necessary to
specify a different name for each instance (the module loading system
requires that every loaded module, even multiple instances of the same
module, have a unique name). This is accomplished by supplying
multiple sets of bonding options in /etc/modprobe.conf, for example:
alias bond0 bonding
options bond0 -o bond0 mode=balance-rr miimon=100
alias bond1 bonding
options bond1 -o bond1 mode=balance-alb miimon=50
will load the bonding module two times. The first instance is
named "bond0" and creates the bond0 device in balance-rr mode with an
miimon of 100. The second instance is named "bond1" and creates the
bond1 device in balance-alb mode with an miimon of 50.
In some circumstances (typically with older distributions),
the above does not work, and the second bonding instance never sees
its options. In that case, the second options line can be substituted
as follows:
install bond1 /sbin/modprobe --ignore-install bonding -o bond1 \
mode=balance-alb miimon=50
This may be repeated any number of times, specifying a new and
unique name in place of bond1 for each subsequent instance.
3.4 Configuring Bonding Manually via Sysfs
------------------------------------------

10
Documentation/networking/dccp.txt
View File

@ -57,6 +57,16 @@ DCCP_SOCKOPT_SEND_CSCOV is for the receiver and has a different meaning: it
coverage value are also acceptable. The higher the number, the more
restrictive this setting (see [RFC 4340, sec. 9.2.1]).
The following two options apply to CCID 3 exclusively and are getsockopt()-only.
In either case, a TFRC info struct (defined in <linux/tfrc.h>) is returned.
DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID_RX_INFO
Returns a `struct tfrc_rx_info' in optval; the buffer for optval and
optlen must be set to at least sizeof(struct tfrc_rx_info).
DCCP_SOCKOPT_CCID_TX_INFO
Returns a `struct tfrc_tx_info' in optval; the buffer for optval and
optlen must be set to at least sizeof(struct tfrc_tx_info).
Sysctl variables
================
Several DCCP default parameters can be managed by the following sysctls

66
Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt
View File

@ -147,6 +147,11 @@ tcp_available_congestion_control - STRING
More congestion control algorithms may be available as modules,
but not loaded.
tcp_base_mss - INTEGER
The initial value of search_low to be used by Packetization Layer
Path MTU Discovery (MTU probing). If MTU probing is enabled,
this is the inital MSS used by the connection.
tcp_congestion_control - STRING
Set the congestion control algorithm to be used for new
connections. The algorithm "reno" is always available, but
@ -174,11 +179,31 @@ tcp_fin_timeout - INTEGER
because they eat maximum 1.5K of memory, but they tend
to live longer. Cf. tcp_max_orphans.
tcp_frto - BOOLEAN
tcp_frto - INTEGER
Enables F-RTO, an enhanced recovery algorithm for TCP retransmission
timeouts. It is particularly beneficial in wireless environments
where packet loss is typically due to random radio interference
rather than intermediate router congestion.
rather than intermediate router congestion. If set to 1, basic
version is enabled. 2 enables SACK enhanced F-RTO, which is
EXPERIMENTAL. The basic version can be used also when SACK is
enabled for a flow through tcp_sack sysctl.
tcp_frto_response - INTEGER
When F-RTO has detected that a TCP retransmission timeout was
spurious (i.e, the timeout would have been avoided had TCP set a
longer retransmission timeout), TCP has several options what to do
next. Possible values are:
0 Rate halving based; a smooth and conservative response,
results in halved cwnd and ssthresh after one RTT
1 Very conservative response; not recommended because even
though being valid, it interacts poorly with the rest of
Linux TCP, halves cwnd and ssthresh immediately
2 Aggressive response; undoes congestion control measures
that are now known to be unnecessary (ignoring the
possibility of a lost retransmission that would require
TCP to be more cautious), cwnd and ssthresh are restored
to the values prior timeout
Default: 0 (rate halving based)
tcp_keepalive_time - INTEGER
How often TCP sends out keepalive messages when keepalive is enabled.
@ -243,6 +268,27 @@ tcp_mem - vector of 3 INTEGERs: min, pressure, max
Defaults are calculated at boot time from amount of available
memory.
tcp_moderate_rcvbuf - BOOLEAN
If set, TCP performs receive buffer autotuning, attempting to
automatically size the buffer (no greater than tcp_rmem[2]) to
match the size required by the path for full throughput. Enabled by
default.
tcp_mtu_probing - INTEGER
Controls TCP Packetization-Layer Path MTU Discovery. Takes three
values:
0 - Disabled
1 - Disabled by default, enabled when an ICMP black hole detected
2 - Always enabled, use initial MSS of tcp_base_mss.
tcp_no_metrics_save - BOOLEAN
By default, TCP saves various connection metrics in the route cache
when the connection closes, so that connections established in the
near future can use these to set initial conditions. Usually, this
increases overall performance, but may sometimes cause performance
degredation. If set, TCP will not cache metrics on closing
connections.
tcp_orphan_retries - INTEGER
How may times to retry before killing TCP connection, closed
by our side. Default value 7 corresponds to ~50sec-16min
@ -825,6 +871,15 @@ accept_redirects - BOOLEAN
Functional default: enabled if local forwarding is disabled.
disabled if local forwarding is enabled.
accept_source_route - INTEGER
Accept source routing (routing extension header).
> 0: Accept routing header.
= 0: Accept only routing header type 2.
< 0: Do not accept routing header.
Default: 0
autoconf - BOOLEAN
Autoconfigure addresses using Prefix Information in Router
Advertisements.
@ -960,7 +1015,12 @@ bridge-nf-call-ip6tables - BOOLEAN
Default: 1
bridge-nf-filter-vlan-tagged - BOOLEAN
1 : pass bridged vlan-tagged ARP/IP traffic to arptables/iptables.
1 : pass bridged vlan-tagged ARP/IP/IPv6 traffic to {arp,ip,ip6}tables.
0 : disable this.
Default: 1
bridge-nf-filter-pppoe-tagged - BOOLEAN
1 : pass bridged pppoe-tagged IP/IPv6 traffic to {ip,ip6}tables.
0 : disable this.
Default: 1

859
Documentation/networking/rxrpc.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,859 @@
======================
RxRPC NETWORK PROTOCOL
======================
The RxRPC protocol driver provides a reliable two-phase transport on top of UDP
that can be used to perform RxRPC remote operations. This is done over sockets
of AF_RXRPC family, using sendmsg() and recvmsg() with control data to send and
receive data, aborts and errors.
Contents of this document:
(*) Overview.
(*) RxRPC protocol summary.
(*) AF_RXRPC driver model.
(*) Control messages.
(*) Socket options.
(*) Security.
(*) Example client usage.
(*) Example server usage.
(*) AF_RXRPC kernel interface.
========
OVERVIEW
========
RxRPC is a two-layer protocol. There is a session layer which provides
reliable virtual connections using UDP over IPv4 (or IPv6) as the transport
layer, but implements a real network protocol; and there's the presentation
layer which renders structured data to binary blobs and back again using XDR
(as does SunRPC):
+-------------+
| Application |
+-------------+
| XDR | Presentation
+-------------+
| RxRPC | Session
+-------------+
| UDP | Transport
+-------------+
AF_RXRPC provides:
(1) Part of an RxRPC facility for both kernel and userspace applications by
making the session part of it a Linux network protocol (AF_RXRPC).
(2) A two-phase protocol. The client transmits a blob (the request) and then
receives a blob (the reply), and the server receives the request and then
transmits the reply.
(3) Retention of the reusable bits of the transport system set up for one call
to speed up subsequent calls.
(4) A secure protocol, using the Linux kernel's key retention facility to
manage security on the client end. The server end must of necessity be
more active in security negotiations.
AF_RXRPC does not provide XDR marshalling/presentation facilities. That is
left to the application. AF_RXRPC only deals in blobs. Even the operation ID
is just the first four bytes of the request blob, and as such is beyond the
kernel's interest.
Sockets of AF_RXRPC family are:
(1) created as type SOCK_DGRAM;
(2) provided with a protocol of the type of underlying transport they're going
to use - currently only PF_INET is supported.
The Andrew File System (AFS) is an example of an application that uses this and
that has both kernel (filesystem) and userspace (utility) components.
======================
RXRPC PROTOCOL SUMMARY
======================
An overview of the RxRPC protocol:
(*) RxRPC sits on top of another networking protocol (UDP is the only option
currently), and uses this to provide network transport. UDP ports, for
example, provide transport endpoints.
(*) RxRPC supports multiple virtual "connections" from any given transport
endpoint, thus allowing the endpoints to be shared, even to the same
remote endpoint.
(*) Each connection goes to a particular "service". A connection may not go
to multiple services. A service may be considered the RxRPC equivalent of
a port number. AF_RXRPC permits multiple services to share an endpoint.
(*) Client-originating packets are marked, thus a transport endpoint can be
shared between client and server connections (connections have a
direction).
(*) Up to a billion connections may be supported concurrently between one
local transport endpoint and one service on one remote endpoint. An RxRPC
connection is described by seven numbers:
Local address }
Local port } Transport (UDP) address
Remote address }
Remote port }
Direction
Connection ID
Service ID
(*) Each RxRPC operation is a "call". A connection may make up to four
billion calls, but only up to four calls may be in progress on a
connection at any one time.
(*) Calls are two-phase and asymmetric: the client sends its request data,
which the service receives; then the service transmits the reply data
which the client receives.
(*) The data blobs are of indefinite size, the end of a phase is marked with a
flag in the packet. The number of packets of data making up one blob may
not exceed 4 billion, however, as this would cause the sequence number to
wrap.
(*) The first four bytes of the request data are the service operation ID.
(*) Security is negotiated on a per-connection basis. The connection is
initiated by the first data packet on it arriving. If security is
requested, the server then issues a "challenge" and then the client
replies with a "response". If the response is successful, the security is
set for the lifetime of that connection, and all subsequent calls made
upon it use that same security. In the event that the server lets a
connection lapse before the client, the security will be renegotiated if
the client uses the connection again.
(*) Calls use ACK packets to handle reliability. Data packets are also
explicitly sequenced per call.
(*) There are two types of positive acknowledgement: hard-ACKs and soft-ACKs.
A hard-ACK indicates to the far side that all the data received to a point
has been received and processed; a soft-ACK indicates that the data has
been received but may yet be discarded and re-requested. The sender may
not discard any transmittable packets until they've been hard-ACK'd.
(*) Reception of a reply data packet implicitly hard-ACK's all the data
packets that make up the request.
(*) An call is complete when the request has been sent, the reply has been
received and the final hard-ACK on the last packet of the reply has
reached the server.
(*) An call may be aborted by either end at any time up to its completion.
=====================
AF_RXRPC DRIVER MODEL
=====================
About the AF_RXRPC driver:
(*) The AF_RXRPC protocol transparently uses internal sockets of the transport
protocol to represent transport endpoints.
(*) AF_RXRPC sockets map onto RxRPC connection bundles. Actual RxRPC
connections are handled transparently. One client socket may be used to
make multiple simultaneous calls to the same service. One server socket
may handle calls from many clients.
(*) Additional parallel client connections will be initiated to support extra
concurrent calls, up to a tunable limit.
(*) Each connection is retained for a certain amount of time [tunable] after
the last call currently using it has completed in case a new call is made
that could reuse it.
(*) Each internal UDP socket is retained [tunable] for a certain amount of
time [tunable] after the last connection using it discarded, in case a new
connection is made that could use it.
(*) A client-side connection is only shared between calls if they have have
the same key struct describing their security (and assuming the calls
would otherwise share the connection). Non-secured calls would also be
able to share connections with each other.
(*) A server-side connection is shared if the client says it is.
(*) ACK'ing is handled by the protocol driver automatically, including ping
replying.
(*) SO_KEEPALIVE automatically pings the other side to keep the connection
alive [TODO].
(*) If an ICMP error is received, all calls affected by that error will be
aborted with an appropriate network error passed through recvmsg().
Interaction with the user of the RxRPC socket:
(*) A socket is made into a server socket by binding an address with a
non-zero service ID.
(*) In the client, sending a request is achieved with one or more sendmsgs,
followed by the reply being received with one or more recvmsgs.
(*) The first sendmsg for a request to be sent from a client contains a tag to
be used in all other sendmsgs or recvmsgs associated with that call. The
tag is carried in the control data.
(*) connect() is used to supply a default destination address for a client
socket. This may be overridden by supplying an alternate address to the
first sendmsg() of a call (struct msghdr::msg_name).
(*) If connect() is called on an unbound client, a random local port will
bound before the operation takes place.
(*) A server socket may also be used to make client calls. To do this, the
first sendmsg() of the call must specify the target address. The server's
transport endpoint is used to send the packets.
(*) Once the application has received the last message associated with a call,
the tag is guaranteed not to be seen again, and so it can be used to pin
client resources. A new call can then be initiated with the same tag
without fear of interference.
(*) In the server, a request is received with one or more recvmsgs, then the
the reply is transmitted with one or more sendmsgs, and then the final ACK
is received with a last recvmsg.
(*) When sending data for a call, sendmsg is given MSG_MORE if there's more
data to come on that call.
(*) When receiving data for a call, recvmsg flags MSG_MORE if there's more
data to come for that call.
(*) When receiving data or messages for a call, MSG_EOR is flagged by recvmsg
to indicate the terminal message for that call.
(*) A call may be aborted by adding an abort control message to the control
data. Issuing an abort terminates the kernel's use of that call's tag.
Any messages waiting in the receive queue for that call will be discarded.
(*) Aborts, busy notifications and challenge packets are delivered by recvmsg,
and control data messages will be set to indicate the context. Receiving
an abort or a busy message terminates the kernel's use of that call's tag.
(*) The control data part of the msghdr struct is used for a number of things:
(*) The tag of the intended or affected call.
(*) Sending or receiving errors, aborts and busy notifications.
(*) Notifications of incoming calls.
(*) Sending debug requests and receiving debug replies [TODO].
(*) When the kernel has received and set up an incoming call, it sends a
message to server application to let it know there's a new call awaiting
its acceptance [recvmsg reports a special control message]. The server
application then uses sendmsg to assign a tag to the new call. Once that
is done, the first part of the request data will be delivered by recvmsg.
(*) The server application has to provide the server socket with a keyring of
secret keys corresponding to the security types it permits. When a secure
connection is being set up, the kernel looks up the appropriate secret key
in the keyring and then sends a challenge packet to the client and
receives a response packet. The kernel then checks the authorisation of
the packet and either aborts the connection or sets up the security.
(*) The name of the key a client will use to secure its communications is
nominated by a socket option.
Notes on recvmsg:
(*) If there's a sequence of data messages belonging to a particular call on
the receive queue, then recvmsg will keep working through them until:
(a) it meets the end of that call's received data,
(b) it meets a non-data message,
(c) it meets a message belonging to a different call, or
(d) it fills the user buffer.
If recvmsg is called in blocking mode, it will keep sleeping, awaiting the
reception of further data, until one of the above four conditions is met.
(2) MSG_PEEK operates similarly, but will return immediately if it has put any
data in the buffer rather than sleeping until it can fill the buffer.
(3) If a data message is only partially consumed in filling a user buffer,
then the remainder of that message will be left on the front of the queue
for the next taker. MSG_TRUNC will never be flagged.
(4) If there is more data to be had on a call (it hasn't copied the last byte
of the last data message in that phase yet), then MSG_MORE will be
flagged.
================
CONTROL MESSAGES
================
AF_RXRPC makes use of control messages in sendmsg() and recvmsg() to multiplex
calls, to invoke certain actions and to report certain conditions. These are:
MESSAGE ID SRT DATA MEANING
======================= === =========== ===============================
RXRPC_USER_CALL_ID sr- User ID App's call specifier
RXRPC_ABORT srt Abort code Abort code to issue/received
RXRPC_ACK -rt n/a Final ACK received
RXRPC_NET_ERROR -rt error num Network error on call
RXRPC_BUSY -rt n/a Call rejected (server busy)
RXRPC_LOCAL_ERROR -rt error num Local error encountered
RXRPC_NEW_CALL -r- n/a New call received
RXRPC_ACCEPT s-- n/a Accept new call
(SRT = usable in Sendmsg / delivered by Recvmsg / Terminal message)
(*) RXRPC_USER_CALL_ID
This is used to indicate the application's call ID. It's an unsigned long
that the app specifies in the client by attaching it to the first data
message or in the server by passing it in association with an RXRPC_ACCEPT
message. recvmsg() passes it in conjunction with all messages except
those of the RXRPC_NEW_CALL message.
(*) RXRPC_ABORT
This is can be used by an application to abort a call by passing it to
sendmsg, or it can be delivered by recvmsg to indicate a remote abort was
received. Either way, it must be associated with an RXRPC_USER_CALL_ID to
specify the call affected. If an abort is being sent, then error EBADSLT
will be returned if there is no call with that user ID.
(*) RXRPC_ACK
This is delivered to a server application to indicate that the final ACK
of a call was received from the client. It will be associated with an
RXRPC_USER_CALL_ID to indicate the call that's now complete.
(*) RXRPC_NET_ERROR
This is delivered to an application to indicate that an ICMP error message
was encountered in the process of trying to talk to the peer. An
errno-class integer value will be included in the control message data
indicating the problem, and an RXRPC_USER_CALL_ID will indicate the call
affected.
(*) RXRPC_BUSY
This is delivered to a client application to indicate that a call was
rejected by the server due to the server being busy. It will be
associated with an RXRPC_USER_CALL_ID to indicate the rejected call.
(*) RXRPC_LOCAL_ERROR
This is delivered to an application to indicate that a local error was
encountered and that a call has been aborted because of it. An
errno-class integer value will be included in the control message data
indicating the problem, and an RXRPC_USER_CALL_ID will indicate the call
affected.
(*) RXRPC_NEW_CALL
This is delivered to indicate to a server application that a new call has
arrived and is awaiting acceptance. No user ID is associated with this,
as a user ID must subsequently be assigned by doing an RXRPC_ACCEPT.
(*) RXRPC_ACCEPT
This is used by a server application to attempt to accept a call and
assign it a user ID. It should be associated with an RXRPC_USER_CALL_ID
to indicate the user ID to be assigned. If there is no call to be
accepted (it may have timed out, been aborted, etc.), then sendmsg will
return error ENODATA. If the user ID is already in use by another call,
then error EBADSLT will be returned.
==============
SOCKET OPTIONS
==============
AF_RXRPC sockets support a few socket options at the SOL_RXRPC level:
(*) RXRPC_SECURITY_KEY
This is used to specify the description of the key to be used. The key is
extracted from the calling process's keyrings with request_key() and
should be of "rxrpc" type.
The optval pointer points to the description string, and optlen indicates
how long the string is, without the NUL terminator.
(*) RXRPC_SECURITY_KEYRING
Similar to above but specifies a keyring of server secret keys to use (key
type "keyring"). See the "Security" section.
(*) RXRPC_EXCLUSIVE_CONNECTION
This is used to request that new connections should be used for each call
made subsequently on this socket. optval should be NULL and optlen 0.
(*) RXRPC_MIN_SECURITY_LEVEL
This is used to specify the minimum security level required for calls on
this socket. optval must point to an int containing one of the following
values:
(a) RXRPC_SECURITY_PLAIN
Encrypted checksum only.
(b) RXRPC_SECURITY_AUTH
Encrypted checksum plus packet padded and first eight bytes of packet
encrypted - which includes the actual packet length.
(c) RXRPC_SECURITY_ENCRYPTED
Encrypted checksum plus entire packet padded and encrypted, including
actual packet length.
========
SECURITY
========
Currently, only the kerberos 4 equivalent protocol has been implemented
(security index 2 - rxkad). This requires the rxkad module to be loaded and,
on the client, tickets of the appropriate type to be obtained from the AFS
kaserver or the kerberos server and installed as "rxrpc" type keys. This is
normally done using the klog program. An example simple klog program can be
found at:
http://people.redhat.com/~dhowells/rxrpc/klog.c
The payload provided to add_key() on the client should be of the following
form:
struct rxrpc_key_sec2_v1 {
uint16_t security_index; /* 2 */
uint16_t ticket_length; /* length of ticket[] */
uint32_t expiry; /* time at which expires */
uint8_t kvno; /* key version number */
uint8_t __pad[3];
uint8_t session_key[8]; /* DES session key */
uint8_t ticket[0]; /* the encrypted ticket */
};
Where the ticket blob is just appended to the above structure.
For the server, keys of type "rxrpc_s" must be made available to the server.
They have a description of "<serviceID>:<securityIndex>" (eg: "52:2" for an
rxkad key for the AFS VL service). When such a key is created, it should be
given the server's secret key as the instantiation data (see the example
below).
add_key("rxrpc_s", "52:2", secret_key, 8, keyring);
A keyring is passed to the server socket by naming it in a sockopt. The server
socket then looks the server secret keys up in this keyring when secure
incoming connections are made. This can be seen in an example program that can
be found at:
http://people.redhat.com/~dhowells/rxrpc/listen.c
====================
EXAMPLE CLIENT USAGE
====================
A client would issue an operation by:
(1) An RxRPC socket is set up by:
client = socket(AF_RXRPC, SOCK_DGRAM, PF_INET);
Where the third parameter indicates the protocol family of the transport
socket used - usually IPv4 but it can also be IPv6 [TODO].
(2) A local address can optionally be bound:
struct sockaddr_rxrpc srx = {
.srx_family = AF_RXRPC,
.srx_service = 0, /* we're a client */
.transport_type = SOCK_DGRAM, /* type of transport socket */
.transport.sin_family = AF_INET,
.transport.sin_port = htons(7000), /* AFS callback */
.transport.sin_address = 0, /* all local interfaces */
};
bind(client, &srx, sizeof(srx));
This specifies the local UDP port to be used. If not given, a random
non-privileged port will be used. A UDP port may be shared between
several unrelated RxRPC sockets. Security is handled on a basis of
per-RxRPC virtual connection.
(3) The security is set:
const char *key = "AFS:cambridge.redhat.com";
setsockopt(client, SOL_RXRPC, RXRPC_SECURITY_KEY, key, strlen(key));
This issues a request_key() to get the key representing the security
context. The minimum security level can be set:
unsigned int sec = RXRPC_SECURITY_ENCRYPTED;
setsockopt(client, SOL_RXRPC, RXRPC_MIN_SECURITY_LEVEL,
&sec, sizeof(sec));
(4) The server to be contacted can then be specified (alternatively this can
be done through sendmsg):
struct sockaddr_rxrpc srx = {
.srx_family = AF_RXRPC,
.srx_service = VL_SERVICE_ID,
.transport_type = SOCK_DGRAM, /* type of transport socket */
.transport.sin_family = AF_INET,
.transport.sin_port = htons(7005), /* AFS volume manager */
.transport.sin_address = ...,
};
connect(client, &srx, sizeof(srx));
(5) The request data should then be posted to the server socket using a series
of sendmsg() calls, each with the following control message attached:
RXRPC_USER_CALL_ID - specifies the user ID for this call
MSG_MORE should be set in msghdr::msg_flags on all but the last part of
the request. Multiple requests may be made simultaneously.
If a call is intended to go to a destination other then the default
specified through connect(), then msghdr::msg_name should be set on the
first request message of that call.
(6) The reply data will then be posted to the server socket for recvmsg() to
pick up. MSG_MORE will be flagged by recvmsg() if there's more reply data
for a particular call to be read. MSG_EOR will be set on the terminal
read for a call.
All data will be delivered with the following control message attached:
RXRPC_USER_CALL_ID - specifies the user ID for this call
If an abort or error occurred, this will be returned in the control data
buffer instead, and MSG_EOR will be flagged to indicate the end of that
call.
====================
EXAMPLE SERVER USAGE
====================
A server would be set up to accept operations in the following manner:
(1) An RxRPC socket is created by:
server = socket(AF_RXRPC, SOCK_DGRAM, PF_INET);
Where the third parameter indicates the address type of the transport
socket used - usually IPv4.
(2) Security is set up if desired by giving the socket a keyring with server
secret keys in it:
keyring = add_key("keyring", "AFSkeys", NULL, 0,
KEY_SPEC_PROCESS_KEYRING);
const char secret_key[8] = {
0xa7, 0x83, 0x8a, 0xcb, 0xc7, 0x83, 0xec, 0x94 };
add_key("rxrpc_s", "52:2", secret_key, 8, keyring);
setsockopt(server, SOL_RXRPC, RXRPC_SECURITY_KEYRING, "AFSkeys", 7);
The keyring can be manipulated after it has been given to the socket. This
permits the server to add more keys, replace keys, etc. whilst it is live.
(2) A local address must then be bound:
struct sockaddr_rxrpc srx = {
.srx_family = AF_RXRPC,
.srx_service = VL_SERVICE_ID, /* RxRPC service ID */
.transport_type = SOCK_DGRAM, /* type of transport socket */
.transport.sin_family = AF_INET,
.transport.sin_port = htons(7000), /* AFS callback */
.transport.sin_address = 0, /* all local interfaces */
};
bind(server, &srx, sizeof(srx));
(3) The server is then set to listen out for incoming calls:
listen(server, 100);
(4) The kernel notifies the server of pending incoming connections by sending
it a message for each. This is received with recvmsg() on the server
socket. It has no data, and has a single dataless control message
attached:
RXRPC_NEW_CALL
The address that can be passed back by recvmsg() at this point should be
ignored since the call for which the message was posted may have gone by
the time it is accepted - in which case the first call still on the queue
will be accepted.
(5) The server then accepts the new call by issuing a sendmsg() with two
pieces of control data and no actual data:
RXRPC_ACCEPT - indicate connection acceptance
RXRPC_USER_CALL_ID - specify user ID for this call
(6) The first request data packet will then be posted to the server socket for
recvmsg() to pick up. At that point, the RxRPC address for the call can
be read from the address fields in the msghdr struct.
Subsequent request data will be posted to the server socket for recvmsg()
to collect as it arrives. All but the last piece of the request data will
be delivered with MSG_MORE flagged.
All data will be delivered with the following control message attached:
RXRPC_USER_CALL_ID - specifies the user ID for this call
(8) The reply data should then be posted to the server socket using a series
of sendmsg() calls, each with the following control messages attached:
RXRPC_USER_CALL_ID - specifies the user ID for this call
MSG_MORE should be set in msghdr::msg_flags on all but the last message
for a particular call.
(9) The final ACK from the client will be posted for retrieval by recvmsg()
when it is received. It will take the form of a dataless message with two
control messages attached:
RXRPC_USER_CALL_ID - specifies the user ID for this call
RXRPC_ACK - indicates final ACK (no data)
MSG_EOR will be flagged to indicate that this is the final message for
this call.
(10) Up to the point the final packet of reply data is sent, the call can be
aborted by calling sendmsg() with a dataless message with the following
control messages attached:
RXRPC_USER_CALL_ID - specifies the user ID for this call
RXRPC_ABORT - indicates abort code (4 byte data)
Any packets waiting in the socket's receive queue will be discarded if
this is issued.
Note that all the communications for a particular service take place through
the one server socket, using control messages on sendmsg() and recvmsg() to
determine the call affected.
=========================
AF_RXRPC KERNEL INTERFACE
=========================
The AF_RXRPC module also provides an interface for use by in-kernel utilities
such as the AFS filesystem. This permits such a utility to:
(1) Use different keys directly on individual client calls on one socket
rather than having to open a whole slew of sockets, one for each key it
might want to use.
(2) Avoid having RxRPC call request_key() at the point of issue of a call or
opening of a socket. Instead the utility is responsible for requesting a
key at the appropriate point. AFS, for instance, would do this during VFS
operations such as open() or unlink(). The key is then handed through
when the call is initiated.
(3) Request the use of something other than GFP_KERNEL to allocate memory.
(4) Avoid the overhead of using the recvmsg() call. RxRPC messages can be
intercepted before they get put into the socket Rx queue and the socket
buffers manipulated directly.
To use the RxRPC facility, a kernel utility must still open an AF_RXRPC socket,
bind an addess as appropriate and listen if it's to be a server socket, but
then it passes this to the kernel interface functions.
The kernel interface functions are as follows:
(*) Begin a new client call.
struct rxrpc_call *
rxrpc_kernel_begin_call(struct socket *sock,
struct sockaddr_rxrpc *srx,
struct key *key,
unsigned long user_call_ID,
gfp_t gfp);
This allocates the infrastructure to make a new RxRPC call and assigns
call and connection numbers. The call will be made on the UDP port that
the socket is bound to. The call will go to the destination address of a
connected client socket unless an alternative is supplied (srx is
non-NULL).
If a key is supplied then this will be used to secure the call instead of
the key bound to the socket with the RXRPC_SECURITY_KEY sockopt. Calls
secured in this way will still share connections if at all possible.
The user_call_ID is equivalent to that supplied to sendmsg() in the
control data buffer. It is entirely feasible to use this to point to a
kernel data structure.
If this function is successful, an opaque reference to the RxRPC call is
returned. The caller now holds a reference on this and it must be
properly ended.
(*) End a client call.
void rxrpc_kernel_end_call(struct rxrpc_call *call);
This is used to end a previously begun call. The user_call_ID is expunged
from AF_RXRPC's knowledge and will not be seen again in association with
the specified call.
(*) Send data through a call.
int rxrpc_kernel_send_data(struct rxrpc_call *call, struct msghdr *msg,
size_t len);
This is used to supply either the request part of a client call or the
reply part of a server call. msg.msg_iovlen and msg.msg_iov specify the
data buffers to be used. msg_iov may not be NULL and must point
exclusively to in-kernel virtual addresses. msg.msg_flags may be given
MSG_MORE if there will be subsequent data sends for this call.
The msg must not specify a destination address, control data or any flags
other than MSG_MORE. len is the total amount of data to transmit.
(*) Abort a call.
void rxrpc_kernel_abort_call(struct rxrpc_call *call, u32 abort_code);
This is used to abort a call if it's still in an abortable state. The
abort code specified will be placed in the ABORT message sent.
(*) Intercept received RxRPC messages.
typedef void (*rxrpc_interceptor_t)(struct sock *sk,
unsigned long user_call_ID,
struct sk_buff *skb);
void
rxrpc_kernel_intercept_rx_messages(struct socket *sock,
rxrpc_interceptor_t interceptor);
This installs an interceptor function on the specified AF_RXRPC socket.
All messages that would otherwise wind up in the socket's Rx queue are
then diverted to this function. Note that care must be taken to process
the messages in the right order to maintain DATA message sequentiality.
The interceptor function itself is provided with the address of the socket
and handling the incoming message, the ID assigned by the kernel utility
to the call and the socket buffer containing the message.
The skb->mark field indicates the type of message:
MARK MEANING
=============================== =======================================
RXRPC_SKB_MARK_DATA Data message
RXRPC_SKB_MARK_FINAL_ACK Final ACK received for an incoming call
RXRPC_SKB_MARK_BUSY Client call rejected as server busy
RXRPC_SKB_MARK_REMOTE_ABORT Call aborted by peer
RXRPC_SKB_MARK_NET_ERROR Network error detected
RXRPC_SKB_MARK_LOCAL_ERROR Local error encountered
RXRPC_SKB_MARK_NEW_CALL New incoming call awaiting acceptance
The remote abort message can be probed with rxrpc_kernel_get_abort_code().
The two error messages can be probed with rxrpc_kernel_get_error_number().
A new call can be accepted with rxrpc_kernel_accept_call().
Data messages can have their contents extracted with the usual bunch of
socket buffer manipulation functions. A data message can be determined to
be the last one in a sequence with rxrpc_kernel_is_data_last(). When a
data message has been used up, rxrpc_kernel_data_delivered() should be
called on it..
Non-data messages should be handled to rxrpc_kernel_free_skb() to dispose
of. It is possible to get extra refs on all types of message for later
freeing, but this may pin the state of a call until the message is finally
freed.
(*) Accept an incoming call.
struct rxrpc_call *
rxrpc_kernel_accept_call(struct socket *sock,
unsigned long user_call_ID);
This is used to accept an incoming call and to assign it a call ID. This
function is similar to rxrpc_kernel_begin_call() and calls accepted must
be ended in the same way.
If this function is successful, an opaque reference to the RxRPC call is
returned. The caller now holds a reference on this and it must be
properly ended.
(*) Reject an incoming call.
int rxrpc_kernel_reject_call(struct socket *sock);
This is used to reject the first incoming call on the socket's queue with
a BUSY message. -ENODATA is returned if there were no incoming calls.
Other errors may be returned if the call had been aborted (-ECONNABORTED)
or had timed out (-ETIME).
(*) Record the delivery of a data message and free it.
void rxrpc_kernel_data_delivered(struct sk_buff *skb);
This is used to record a data message as having been delivered and to
update the ACK state for the call. The socket buffer will be freed.
(*) Free a message.
void rxrpc_kernel_free_skb(struct sk_buff *skb);
This is used to free a non-DATA socket buffer intercepted from an AF_RXRPC
socket.
(*) Determine if a data message is the last one on a call.
bool rxrpc_kernel_is_data_last(struct sk_buff *skb);
This is used to determine if a socket buffer holds the last data message
to be received for a call (true will be returned if it does, false
if not).
The data message will be part of the reply on a client call and the
request on an incoming call. In the latter case there will be more
messages, but in the former case there will not.
(*) Get the abort code from an abort message.
u32 rxrpc_kernel_get_abort_code(struct sk_buff *skb);
This is used to extract the abort code from a remote abort message.
(*) Get the error number from a local or network error message.
int rxrpc_kernel_get_error_number(struct sk_buff *skb);
This is used to extract the error number from a message indicating either
a local error occurred or a network error occurred.

1
Documentation/networking/wan-router.txt
View File

@ -250,7 +250,6 @@ PRODUCT COMPONENTS AND RELATED FILES
sdladrv.h SDLA support module API definitions
sdlasfm.h SDLA firmware module definitions
if_wanpipe.h WANPIPE Socket definitions
if_wanpipe_common.h WANPIPE Socket/Driver common definitions.
sdlapci.h WANPIPE PCI definitions

6
Documentation/oops-tracing.txt
View File

@ -234,6 +234,12 @@ characters, each representing a particular tainted value.
6: 'B' if a page-release function has found a bad page reference or
some unexpected page flags.
7: 'U' if a user specifically requested that the Tainted flag be set,
' ' otherwise.
7: 'U' if a user or user application specifically requested that the
Tainted flag be set, ' ' otherwise.
The primary reason for the 'Tainted: ' string is to tell kernel
debuggers if this is a clean kernel or if anything unusual has
occurred. Tainting is permanent: even if an offending module is

4
Documentation/pci.txt
View File

@ -205,8 +205,8 @@ Tips on when/where to use the above attributes:
exclusively called by the probe() routine, can be marked __devinit.
Ditto for remove() and __devexit.
o If mydriver_probe() is marked with __devinit(), then all address
references to mydriver_probe must use __devexit_p(mydriver_probe)
o If mydriver_remove() is marked with __devexit(), then all address
references to mydriver_remove must use __devexit_p(mydriver_remove)
(in the struct pci_driver declaration for example).
__devexit_p() will generate the function name _or_ NULL if the
function will be discarded. For an example, see drivers/net/tg3.c.

21
Documentation/power/interface.txt
View File

@ -18,17 +18,10 @@ states.
/sys/power/disk controls the operating mode of the suspend-to-disk
mechanism. Suspend-to-disk can be handled in several ways. The
greatest distinction is who writes memory to disk - the firmware or
the kernel. If the firmware does it, we assume that it also handles
suspending the system.
If the kernel does it, then we have three options for putting the system
to sleep - using the platform driver (e.g. ACPI or other PM
registers), powering off the system or rebooting the system (for
testing). The system will support either 'firmware' or 'platform', and
that is known a priori. But, the user may choose 'shutdown' or
'reboot' as alternatives.
mechanism. Suspend-to-disk can be handled in several ways. We have a
few options for putting the system to sleep - using the platform driver
(e.g. ACPI or other pm_ops), powering off the system or rebooting the
system (for testing).
Additionally, /sys/power/disk can be used to turn on one of the two testing
modes of the suspend-to-disk mechanism: 'testproc' or 'test'. If the
@ -44,16 +37,12 @@ is being slow and which device drivers are misbehaving.
Reading from this file will display what the mode is currently set
to. Writing to this file will accept one of
'firmware'
'platform'
'platform' (only if the platform supports it)
'shutdown'
'reboot'
'testproc'
'test'
It will only change to 'firmware' or 'platform' if the system supports
it.
/sys/power/image_size controls the size of the image created by
the suspend-to-disk mechanism. It can be written a string
representing a non-negative integer that will be used as an upper

17
Documentation/power/pci.txt
View File

@ -102,31 +102,28 @@ pci_save_state
--------------
Usage:
pci_save_state(dev, buffer);
pci_save_state(struct pci_dev *dev);
Description:
Save first 64 bytes of PCI config space. Buffer must be allocated by
caller.
Save first 64 bytes of PCI config space, along with any additional
PCI-Express or PCI-X information.
pci_restore_state
-----------------
Usage:
pci_restore_state(dev, buffer);
pci_restore_state(struct pci_dev *dev);
Description:
Restore previously saved config space. (First 64 bytes only);
If buffer is NULL, then restore what information we know about the
device from bootup: BARs and interrupt line.
Restore previously saved config space.
pci_set_power_state
-------------------
Usage:
pci_set_power_state(dev, state);
pci_set_power_state(struct pci_dev *dev, pci_power_t state);
Description:
Transition device to low power state using PCI PM Capabilities
@ -142,7 +139,7 @@ pci_enable_wake
---------------
Usage:
pci_enable_wake(dev, state, enable);
pci_enable_wake(struct pci_dev *dev, pci_power_t state, int enable);
Description:
Enable device to generate PME# during low power state using PCI PM

11
Documentation/power/states.txt
View File

@ -62,11 +62,12 @@ setup via another operating system for it to use. Despite the
inconvenience, this method requires minimal work by the kernel, since
the firmware will also handle restoring memory contents on resume.
If the kernel is responsible for persistently saving state, a mechanism
called 'swsusp' (Swap Suspend) is used to write memory contents to
free swap space. swsusp has some restrictive requirements, but should
work in most cases. Some, albeit outdated, documentation can be found
in Documentation/power/swsusp.txt.
For suspend-to-disk, a mechanism called swsusp called 'swsusp' (Swap
Suspend) is used to write memory contents to free swap space.
swsusp has some restrictive requirements, but should work in most
cases. Some, albeit outdated, documentation can be found in
Documentation/power/swsusp.txt. Alternatively, userspace can do most
of the actual suspend to disk work, see userland-swsusp.txt.
Once memory state is written to disk, the system may either enter a
low-power state (like ACPI S4), or it may simply power down. Powering

14
Documentation/power/swsusp.txt
View File

@ -156,8 +156,7 @@ instead set the PF_NOFREEZE process flag when creating the thread (and
be very careful).
Q: What is the difference between "platform", "shutdown" and
"firmware" in /sys/power/disk?
Q: What is the difference between "platform" and "shutdown"?
A:
@ -166,11 +165,8 @@ shutdown: save state in linux, then tell bios to powerdown
platform: save state in linux, then tell bios to powerdown and blink
"suspended led"
firmware: tell bios to save state itself [needs BIOS-specific suspend
partition, and has very little to do with swsusp]
"platform" is actually right thing to do, but "shutdown" is most
reliable.
"platform" is actually right thing to do where supported, but
"shutdown" is most reliable (except on ACPI systems).
Q: I do not understand why you have such strong objections to idea of
selective suspend.
@ -388,8 +384,8 @@ while the system is asleep, maintaining the connection, using true sleep
modes like "suspend-to-RAM" or "standby". (Don't write "disk" to the
/sys/power/state file; write "standby" or "mem".) We've not seen any
hardware that can use these modes through software suspend, although in
theory some systems might support "platform" or "firmware" modes that
won't break the USB connections.
theory some systems might support "platform" modes that won't break the
USB connections.
Remember that it's always a bad idea to unplug a disk drive containing a
mounted filesystem. That's true even when your system is asleep! The

266
Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt
View File

@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
and property data. The old style variable
alignment would make it impossible to do
"simple" insertion of properties using
memove (thanks Milton for
memmove (thanks Milton for
noticing). Updated kernel patch as well
- Correct a few more alignment constraints
- Add a chapter about the device-tree
@ -55,7 +55,7 @@
ToDo:
- Add some definitions of interrupt tree (simple/complex)
- Add some definitions for pci host bridges
- Add some definitions for PCI host bridges
- Add some common address format examples
- Add definitions for standard properties and "compatible"
names for cells that are not already defined by the existing
@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ it with special cases.
forth words isn't required), you can enter the kernel with:
r5 : OF callback pointer as defined by IEEE 1275
bindings to powerpc. Only the 32 bit client interface
bindings to powerpc. Only the 32-bit client interface
is currently supported
r3, r4 : address & length of an initrd if any or 0
@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ it with special cases.
for this is to keep kernels on embedded systems small and efficient;
part of this is due to the fact the code is already that way. In the
future, a kernel may support multiple platforms, but only if the
platforms feature the same core architectire. A single kernel build
platforms feature the same core architecture. A single kernel build
cannot support both configurations with Book E and configurations
with classic Powerpc architectures.
@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ of the boot sequences.... someone speak up if this is wrong!
enable another config option to select the specific board
supported.
NOTE: If ben doesn't merge the setup files, may need to change this to
NOTE: If Ben doesn't merge the setup files, may need to change this to
point to setup_32.c
@ -265,6 +265,9 @@ struct boot_param_header {
booting on */
/* version 3 fields below */
u32 size_dt_strings; /* size of the strings block */
/* version 17 fields below */
u32 size_dt_struct; /* size of the DT structure block */
};
Along with the constants:
@ -310,9 +313,8 @@ struct boot_param_header {
- off_mem_rsvmap
This is an offset from the beginning of the header to the start
of the reserved memory map. This map is a list of pairs of 64
of the reserved memory map. This map is a list of pairs of 64-
bit integers. Each pair is a physical address and a size. The
list is terminated by an entry of size 0. This map provides the
kernel with a list of physical memory areas that are "reserved"
and thus not to be used for memory allocations, especially during
@ -325,7 +327,7 @@ struct boot_param_header {
contain _at least_ this DT block itself (header,total_size). If
you are passing an initrd to the kernel, you should reserve it as
well. You do not need to reserve the kernel image itself. The map
should be 64 bit aligned.
should be 64-bit aligned.
- version
@ -335,10 +337,13 @@ struct boot_param_header {
to reallocate it easily at boot and free up the unused flattened
structure after expansion. Version 16 introduces a new more
"compact" format for the tree itself that is however not backward
compatible. You should always generate a structure of the highest
version defined at the time of your implementation. Currently
that is version 16, unless you explicitly aim at being backward
compatible.
compatible. Version 17 adds an additional field, size_dt_struct,
allowing it to be reallocated or moved more easily (this is
particularly useful for bootloaders which need to make
adjustments to a device tree based on probed information). You
should always generate a structure of the highest version defined
at the time of your implementation. Currently that is version 17,
unless you explicitly aim at being backward compatible.
- last_comp_version
@ -347,7 +352,7 @@ struct boot_param_header {
is backward compatible with version 1 (that is, a kernel build
for version 1 will be able to boot with a version 2 format). You
should put a 1 in this field if you generate a device tree of
version 1 to 3, or 0x10 if you generate a tree of version 0x10
version 1 to 3, or 16 if you generate a tree of version 16 or 17
using the new unit name format.
- boot_cpuid_phys
@ -360,6 +365,17 @@ struct boot_param_header {
point (see further chapters for more informations on the required
device-tree contents)
- size_dt_strings
This field only exists on version 3 and later headers. It
gives the size of the "strings" section of the device tree (which
starts at the offset given by off_dt_strings).
- size_dt_struct
This field only exists on version 17 and later headers. It gives
the size of the "structure" section of the device tree (which
starts at the offset given by off_dt_struct).
So the typical layout of a DT block (though the various parts don't
need to be in that order) looks like this (addresses go from top to
@ -417,7 +433,7 @@ root node who has no parent.
A node has 2 names. The actual node name is generally contained in a
property of type "name" in the node property list whose value is a
zero terminated string and is mandatory for version 1 to 3 of the
format definition (as it is in Open Firmware). Version 0x10 makes it
format definition (as it is in Open Firmware). Version 16 makes it
optional as it can generate it from the unit name defined below.
There is also a "unit name" that is used to differentiate nodes with
@ -461,7 +477,7 @@ referencing another node via "phandle" is when laying out the
interrupt tree which will be described in a further version of this
document.
This "linux, phandle" property is a 32 bit value that uniquely
This "linux, phandle" property is a 32-bit value that uniquely
identifies a node. You are free to use whatever values or system of
values, internal pointers, or whatever to generate these, the only
requirement is that every node for which you provide that property has
@ -471,7 +487,7 @@ Here is an example of a simple device-tree. In this example, an "o"
designates a node followed by the node unit name. Properties are
presented with their name followed by their content. "content"
represents an ASCII string (zero terminated) value, while <content>
represents a 32 bit hexadecimal value. The various nodes in this
represents a 32-bit hexadecimal value. The various nodes in this
example will be discussed in a later chapter. At this point, it is
only meant to give you a idea of what a device-tree looks like. I have
purposefully kept the "name" and "linux,phandle" properties which
@ -497,7 +513,7 @@ looks like in practice.
| |- device_type = "cpu"
| |- reg = <0>
| |- clock-frequency = <5f5e1000>
| |- linux,boot-cpu
| |- 64-bit
| |- linux,phandle = <2>
|
o memory@0
@ -509,7 +525,6 @@ looks like in practice.
o chosen
|- name = "chosen"
|- bootargs = "root=/dev/sda2"
|- linux,platform = <00000600>
|- linux,phandle = <4>
This tree is almost a minimal tree. It pretty much contains the
@ -519,7 +534,7 @@ physical memory layout. It also includes misc information passed
through /chosen, like in this example, the platform type (mandatory)
and the kernel command line arguments (optional).
The /cpus/PowerPC,970@0/linux,boot-cpu property is an example of a
The /cpus/PowerPC,970@0/64-bit property is an example of a
property without a value. All other properties have a value. The
significance of the #address-cells and #size-cells properties will be
explained in chapter IV which defines precisely the required nodes and
@ -544,15 +559,15 @@ Here's the basic structure of a single node:
* [align gap to next 4 bytes boundary]
* for each property:
* token OF_DT_PROP (that is 0x00000003)
* 32 bit value of property value size in bytes (or 0 of no
* value)
* 32 bit value of offset in string block of property name
* 32-bit value of property value size in bytes (or 0 if no
value)
* 32-bit value of offset in string block of property name
* property value data if any
* [align gap to next 4 bytes boundary]
* [child nodes if any]
* token OF_DT_END_NODE (that is 0x00000002)
So the node content can be summarised as a start token, a full path,
So the node content can be summarized as a start token, a full path,
a list of properties, a list of child nodes, and an end token. Every
child node is a full node structure itself as defined above.
@ -584,7 +599,7 @@ provide those properties yourself.
----------------------------------------------
The general rule is documented in the various Open Firmware
documentations. If you chose to describe a bus with the device-tree
documentations. If you choose to describe a bus with the device-tree
and there exist an OF bus binding, then you should follow the
specification. However, the kernel does not require every single
device or bus to be described by the device tree.
@ -597,9 +612,9 @@ those properties defining addresses format for devices directly mapped
on the processor bus.
Those 2 properties define 'cells' for representing an address and a
size. A "cell" is a 32 bit number. For example, if both contain 2
size. A "cell" is a 32-bit number. For example, if both contain 2
like the example tree given above, then an address and a size are both
composed of 2 cells, and each is a 64 bit number (cells are
composed of 2 cells, and each is a 64-bit number (cells are
concatenated and expected to be in big endian format). Another example
is the way Apple firmware defines them, with 2 cells for an address
and one cell for a size. Most 32-bit implementations should define
@ -633,7 +648,7 @@ prom_parse.c file of the recent kernels for your bus type.
The "reg" property only defines addresses and sizes (if #size-cells
is non-0) within a given bus. In order to translate addresses upward
(that is into parent bus addresses, and possibly into cpu physical
(that is into parent bus addresses, and possibly into CPU physical
addresses), all busses must contain a "ranges" property. If the
"ranges" property is missing at a given level, it's assumed that
translation isn't possible. The format of the "ranges" property for a
@ -649,9 +664,9 @@ example, for a PCI host controller, that would be a CPU address. For a
PCI<->ISA bridge, that would be a PCI address. It defines the base
address in the parent bus where the beginning of that range is mapped.
For a new 64 bit powerpc board, I recommend either the 2/2 format or
For a new 64-bit powerpc board, I recommend either the 2/2 format or
Apple's 2/1 format which is slightly more compact since sizes usually
fit in a single 32 bit word. New 32 bit powerpc boards should use a
fit in a single 32-bit word. New 32-bit powerpc boards should use a
1/1 format, unless the processor supports physical addresses greater
than 32-bits, in which case a 2/1 format is recommended.
@ -733,8 +748,7 @@ address which can extend beyond that limit.
that typically get driven by the same platform code in the
kernel, you would use a different "model" property but put a
value in "compatible". The kernel doesn't directly use that
value (see /chosen/linux,platform for how the kernel chooses a
platform type) but it is generally useful.
value but it is generally useful.
The root node is also generally where you add additional properties
specific to your board like the serial number if any, that sort of
@ -766,7 +780,7 @@ address which can extend beyond that limit.
Required properties:
- device_type : has to be "cpu"
- reg : This is the physical cpu number, it's a single 32 bit cell
- reg : This is the physical CPU number, it's a single 32-bit cell
and is also used as-is as the unit number for constructing the
unit name in the full path. For example, with 2 CPUs, you would
have the full path:
@ -778,7 +792,6 @@ address which can extend beyond that limit.
bytes
- d-cache-size : one cell, size of L1 data cache in bytes
- i-cache-size : one cell, size of L1 instruction cache in bytes
- linux, boot-cpu : Should be defined if this cpu is the boot cpu.
Recommended properties:
@ -788,7 +801,7 @@ address which can extend beyond that limit.
the kernel timebase/decrementer calibration based on this
value.
- clock-frequency : a cell indicating the CPU core clock frequency
in Hz. A new property will be defined for 64 bit values, but if
in Hz. A new property will be defined for 64-bit values, but if
your frequency is < 4Ghz, one cell is enough. Here as well as
for the above, the common code doesn't use that property, but
you are welcome to re-use the pSeries or Maple one. A future
@ -835,19 +848,13 @@ address which can extend beyond that limit.
This node is a bit "special". Normally, that's where open firmware
puts some variable environment information, like the arguments, or
phandle pointers to nodes like the main interrupt controller, or the
default input/output devices.
the default input/output devices.
This specification makes a few of these mandatory, but also defines
some linux-specific properties that would be normally constructed by
the prom_init() trampoline when booting with an OF client interface,
but that you have to provide yourself when using the flattened format.
Required properties:
- linux,platform : This is your platform number as assigned by the
architecture maintainers
Recommended properties:
- bootargs : This zero-terminated string is passed as the kernel
@ -861,14 +868,14 @@ address which can extend beyond that limit.
that the kernel tries to find out the default console and has
knowledge of various types like 8250 serial ports. You may want
to extend this function to add your own.
- interrupt-controller : This is one cell containing a phandle
value that matches the "linux,phandle" property of your main
interrupt controller node. May be used for interrupt routing.
Note that u-boot creates and fills in the chosen node for platforms
that use it.
(Note: a practice that is now obsolete was to include a property
under /chosen called interrupt-controller which had a phandle value
that pointed to the main interrupt controller)
f) the /soc<SOCname> node
This node is used to represent a system-on-a-chip (SOC) and must be
@ -916,8 +923,7 @@ address which can extend beyond that limit.
The SOC node may contain child nodes for each SOC device that the
platform uses. Nodes should not be created for devices which exist
on the SOC but are not used by a particular platform. See chapter VI
for more information on how to specify devices that are part of an
SOC.
for more information on how to specify devices that are part of a SOC.
Example SOC node for the MPC8540:
@ -980,7 +986,7 @@ The syntax of the dtc tool is
[-o output-filename] [-V output_version] input_filename
The "output_version" defines what versio of the "blob" format will be
The "output_version" defines what version of the "blob" format will be
generated. Supported versions are 1,2,3 and 16. The default is
currently version 3 but that may change in the future to version 16.
@ -1002,12 +1008,12 @@ supported currently at the toplevel.
*/
property2 = <1234abcd>; /* define a property containing a
* numerical 32 bits value (hexadecimal)
* numerical 32-bit value (hexadecimal)
*/
property3 = <12345678 12345678 deadbeef>;
/* define a property containing 3
* numerical 32 bits values (cells) in
* numerical 32-bit values (cells) in
* hexadecimal
*/
property4 = [0a 0b 0c 0d de ea ad be ef];
@ -1076,7 +1082,7 @@ while all this has been defined and implemented.
its usage in early_init_devtree(), and the corresponding various
early_init_dt_scan_*() callbacks. That code can be re-used in a
GPL bootloader, and as the author of that code, I would be happy
to discuss possible free licencing to any vendor who wishes to
to discuss possible free licensing to any vendor who wishes to
integrate all or part of this code into a non-GPL bootloader.
@ -1085,7 +1091,7 @@ VI - System-on-a-chip devices and nodes
=======================================
Many companies are now starting to develop system-on-a-chip
processors, where the processor core (cpu) and many peripheral devices
processors, where the processor core (CPU) and many peripheral devices
exist on a single piece of silicon. For these SOCs, an SOC node
should be used that defines child nodes for the devices that make
up the SOC. While platforms are not required to use this model in
@ -1117,42 +1123,7 @@ See appendix A for an example partial SOC node definition for the
MPC8540.
2) Specifying interrupt information for SOC devices
---------------------------------------------------
Each device that is part of an SOC and which generates interrupts
should have the following properties:
- interrupt-parent : contains the phandle of the interrupt
controller which handles interrupts for this device
- interrupts : a list of tuples representing the interrupt
number and the interrupt sense and level for each interrupt
for this device.
This information is used by the kernel to build the interrupt table
for the interrupt controllers in the system.
Sense and level information should be encoded as follows:
Devices connected to openPIC-compatible controllers should encode
sense and polarity as follows:
0 = low to high edge sensitive type enabled
1 = active low level sensitive type enabled
2 = active high level sensitive type enabled
3 = high to low edge sensitive type enabled
ISA PIC interrupt controllers should adhere to the ISA PIC
encodings listed below:
0 = active low level sensitive type enabled
1 = active high level sensitive type enabled
2 = high to low edge sensitive type enabled
3 = low to high edge sensitive type enabled
3) Representing devices without a current OF specification
2) Representing devices without a current OF specification
----------------------------------------------------------
Currently, there are many devices on SOCs that do not have a standard
@ -1209,6 +1180,13 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
- phy-handle : The phandle for the PHY connected to this ethernet
controller.
Recommended properties:
- linux,network-index : This is the intended "index" of this
network device. This is used by the bootwrapper to interpret
MAC addresses passed by the firmware when no information other
than indices is available to associate an address with a device.
Example:
ethernet@24000 {
@ -1320,10 +1298,10 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
and additions :
Required properties :
- compatible : Should be "fsl-usb2-mph" for multi port host usb
controllers, or "fsl-usb2-dr" for dual role usb controllers
- phy_type : For multi port host usb controllers, should be one of
"ulpi", or "serial". For dual role usb controllers, should be
- compatible : Should be "fsl-usb2-mph" for multi port host USB
controllers, or "fsl-usb2-dr" for dual role USB controllers
- phy_type : For multi port host USB controllers, should be one of
"ulpi", or "serial". For dual role USB controllers, should be
one of "ulpi", "utmi", "utmi_wide", or "serial".
- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
- port0 : boolean; if defined, indicates port0 is connected for
@ -1347,7 +1325,7 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
- interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that
services interrupts for this device.
Example multi port host usb controller device node :
Example multi port host USB controller device node :
usb@22000 {
device_type = "usb";
compatible = "fsl-usb2-mph";
@ -1361,7 +1339,7 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
port1;
};
Example dual role usb controller device node :
Example dual role USB controller device node :
usb@23000 {
device_type = "usb";
compatible = "fsl-usb2-dr";
@ -1395,7 +1373,7 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
- channel-fifo-len : An integer representing the number of
descriptor pointers each channel fetch fifo can hold.
- exec-units-mask : The bitmask representing what execution units
(EUs) are available. It's a single 32 bit cell. EU information
(EUs) are available. It's a single 32-bit cell. EU information
should be encoded following the SEC's Descriptor Header Dword
EU_SEL0 field documentation, i.e. as follows:
@ -1411,7 +1389,7 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
bits 8 through 31 are reserved for future SEC EUs.
- descriptor-types-mask : The bitmask representing what descriptors
are available. It's a single 32 bit cell. Descriptor type
are available. It's a single 32-bit cell. Descriptor type
information should be encoded following the SEC's Descriptor
Header Dword DESC_TYPE field documentation, i.e. as follows:
@ -1500,7 +1478,7 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
Required properties:
- device_type : should be "spi".
- compatible : should be "fsl_spi".
- mode : the spi operation mode, it can be "cpu" or "qe".
- mode : the SPI operation mode, it can be "cpu" or "qe".
- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
- interrupts : <a b> where a is the interrupt number and b is a
field that represents an encoding of the sense and level
@ -1577,6 +1555,12 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
- mac-address : list of bytes representing the ethernet address.
- phy-handle : The phandle for the PHY connected to this controller.
Recommended properties:
- linux,network-index : This is the intended "index" of this
network device. This is used by the bootwrapper to interpret
MAC addresses passed by the firmware when no information other
than indices is available to associate an address with a device.
Example:
ucc@2000 {
device_type = "network";
@ -1720,7 +1704,7 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
- partitions : Several pairs of 32-bit values where the first value is
partition's offset from the start of the device and the second one is
partition size in bytes with LSB used to signify a read only
partition (so, the parition size should always be an even number).
partition (so, the partition size should always be an even number).
- partition-names : The list of concatenated zero terminated strings
representing the partition names.
- probe-type : The type of probe which should be done for the chip
@ -1741,6 +1725,92 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
More devices will be defined as this spec matures.
VII - Specifying interrupt information for devices
===================================================
The device tree represents the busses and devices of a hardware
system in a form similar to the physical bus topology of the
hardware.
In addition, a logical 'interrupt tree' exists which represents the
hierarchy and routing of interrupts in the hardware.
The interrupt tree model is fully described in the
document "Open Firmware Recommended Practice: Interrupt
Mapping Version 0.9". The document is available at:
<http://playground.sun.com/1275/practice>.
1) interrupts property
----------------------
Devices that generate interrupts to a single interrupt controller
should use the conventional OF representation described in the
OF interrupt mapping documentation.
Each device which generates interrupts must have an 'interrupt'
property. The interrupt property value is an arbitrary number of
of 'interrupt specifier' values which describe the interrupt or
interrupts for the device.
The encoding of an interrupt specifier is determined by the
interrupt domain in which the device is located in the
interrupt tree. The root of an interrupt domain specifies in
its #interrupt-cells property the number of 32-bit cells
required to encode an interrupt specifier. See the OF interrupt
mapping documentation for a detailed description of domains.
For example, the binding for the OpenPIC interrupt controller
specifies an #interrupt-cells value of 2 to encode the interrupt
number and level/sense information. All interrupt children in an
OpenPIC interrupt domain use 2 cells per interrupt in their interrupts
property.
The PCI bus binding specifies a #interrupt-cell value of 1 to encode
which interrupt pin (INTA,INTB,INTC,INTD) is used.
2) interrupt-parent property
----------------------------
The interrupt-parent property is specified to define an explicit
link between a device node and its interrupt parent in
the interrupt tree. The value of interrupt-parent is the
phandle of the parent node.
If the interrupt-parent property is not defined for a node, it's
interrupt parent is assumed to be an ancestor in the node's
_device tree_ hierarchy.
3) OpenPIC Interrupt Controllers
--------------------------------
OpenPIC interrupt controllers require 2 cells to encode
interrupt information. The first cell defines the interrupt
number. The second cell defines the sense and level
information.
Sense and level information should be encoded as follows:
0 = low to high edge sensitive type enabled
1 = active low level sensitive type enabled
2 = active high level sensitive type enabled
3 = high to low edge sensitive type enabled
4) ISA Interrupt Controllers
----------------------------
ISA PIC interrupt controllers require 2 cells to encode
interrupt information. The first cell defines the interrupt
number. The second cell defines the sense and level
information.
ISA PIC interrupt controllers should adhere to the ISA PIC
encodings listed below:
0 = active low level sensitive type enabled
1 = active high level sensitive type enabled
2 = high to low edge sensitive type enabled
3 = low to high edge sensitive type enabled
Appendix A - Sample SOC node for MPC8540
========================================

83
Documentation/s390/crypto/crypto-API.txt
View File

@ -1,83 +0,0 @@
crypto-API support for z990 Message Security Assist (MSA) instructions
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
AUTHOR: Thomas Spatzier (tspat@de.ibm.com)
1. Introduction crypto-API
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
See Documentation/crypto/api-intro.txt for an introduction/description of the
kernel crypto API.
According to api-intro.txt support for z990 crypto instructions has been added
in the algorithm api layer of the crypto API. Several files containing z990
optimized implementations of crypto algorithms are placed in the
arch/s390/crypto directory.
2. Probing for availability of MSA
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
It should be possible to use Kernels with the z990 crypto implementations both
on machines with MSA available and on those without MSA (pre z990 or z990
without MSA). Therefore a simple probing mechanism has been implemented:
In the init function of each crypto module the availability of MSA and of the
respective crypto algorithm in particular will be tested. If the algorithm is
available the module will load and register its algorithm with the crypto API.
If the respective crypto algorithm is not available, the init function will
return -ENOSYS. In that case a fallback to the standard software implementation
of the crypto algorithm must be taken ( -> the standard crypto modules are
also built when compiling the kernel).
3. Ensuring z990 crypto module preference
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
If z990 crypto instructions are available the optimized modules should be
preferred instead of standard modules.
3.1. compiled-in modules
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
For compiled-in modules it has to be ensured that the z990 modules are linked
before the standard crypto modules. Then, on system startup the init functions
of z990 crypto modules will be called first and query for availability of z990
crypto instructions. If instruction is available, the z990 module will register
its crypto algorithm implementation -> the load of the standard module will fail
since the algorithm is already registered.
If z990 crypto instruction is not available the load of the z990 module will
fail -> the standard module will load and register its algorithm.
3.2. dynamic modules
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
A system administrator has to take care of giving preference to z990 crypto
modules. If MSA is available appropriate lines have to be added to
/etc/modprobe.conf.
Example: z990 crypto instruction for SHA1 algorithm is available
add the following line to /etc/modprobe.conf (assuming the
z990 crypto modules for SHA1 is called sha1_z990):
alias sha1 sha1_z990
-> when the sha1 algorithm is requested through the crypto API
(which has a module autoloader) the z990 module will be loaded.
TBD: a userspace module probing mechanism
something like 'probe sha1 sha1_z990 sha1' in modprobe.conf
-> try module sha1_z990, if it fails to load standard module sha1
the 'probe' statement is currently not supported in modprobe.conf
4. Currently implemented z990 crypto algorithms
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The following crypto algorithms with z990 MSA support are currently implemented.
The name of each algorithm under which it is registered in crypto API and the
name of the respective module is given in square brackets.
- SHA1 Digest Algorithm [sha1 -> sha1_z990]
- DES Encrypt/Decrypt Algorithm (64bit key) [des -> des_z990]
- Triple DES Encrypt/Decrypt Algorithm (128bit key) [des3_ede128 -> des_z990]
- Triple DES Encrypt/Decrypt Algorithm (192bit key) [des3_ede -> des_z990]
In order to load, for example, the sha1_z990 module when the sha1 algorithm is
requested (see 3.2.) add 'alias sha1 sha1_z990' to /etc/modprobe.conf.

87
Documentation/s390/zfcpdump.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
s390 SCSI dump tool (zfcpdump)
System z machines (z900 or higher) provide hardware support for creating system
dumps on SCSI disks. The dump process is initiated by booting a dump tool, which
has to create a dump of the current (probably crashed) Linux image. In order to
not overwrite memory of the crashed Linux with data of the dump tool, the
hardware saves some memory plus the register sets of the boot cpu before the
dump tool is loaded. There exists an SCLP hardware interface to obtain the saved
memory afterwards. Currently 32 MB are saved.
This zfcpdump implementation consists of a Linux dump kernel together with
a userspace dump tool, which are loaded together into the saved memory region
below 32 MB. zfcpdump is installed on a SCSI disk using zipl (as contained in
the s390-tools package) to make the device bootable. The operator of a Linux
system can then trigger a SCSI dump by booting the SCSI disk, where zfcpdump
resides on.
The kernel part of zfcpdump is implemented as a debugfs file under "zcore/mem",
which exports memory and registers of the crashed Linux in an s390
standalone dump format. It can be used in the same way as e.g. /dev/mem. The
dump format defines a 4K header followed by plain uncompressed memory. The
register sets are stored in the prefix pages of the respective cpus. To build a
dump enabled kernel with the zcore driver, the kernel config option
CONFIG_ZFCPDUMP has to be set. When reading from "zcore/mem", the part of
memory, which has been saved by hardware is read by the driver via the SCLP
hardware interface. The second part is just copied from the non overwritten real
memory.
The userspace application of zfcpdump can reside e.g. in an intitramfs or an
initrd. It reads from zcore/mem and writes the system dump to a file on a
SCSI disk.
To build a zfcpdump kernel use the following settings in your kernel
configuration:
* CONFIG_ZFCPDUMP=y
* Enable ZFCP driver
* Enable SCSI driver
* Enable ext2 and ext3 filesystems
* Disable as many features as possible to keep the kernel small.
E.g. network support is not needed at all.
To use the zfcpdump userspace application in an initramfs you have to do the
following:
* Copy the zfcpdump executable somewhere into your Linux tree.
E.g. to "arch/s390/boot/zfcpdump. If you do not want to include
shared libraries, compile the tool with the "-static" gcc option.
* If you want to include e2fsck, add it to your source tree, too. The zfcpdump
application attempts to start /sbin/e2fsck from the ramdisk.
* Use an initramfs config file like the following:
dir /dev 755 0 0
nod /dev/console 644 0 0 c 5 1
nod /dev/null 644 0 0 c 1 3
nod /dev/sda1 644 0 0 b 8 1
nod /dev/sda2 644 0 0 b 8 2
nod /dev/sda3 644 0 0 b 8 3
nod /dev/sda4 644 0 0 b 8 4
nod /dev/sda5 644 0 0 b 8 5
nod /dev/sda6 644 0 0 b 8 6
nod /dev/sda7 644 0 0 b 8 7
nod /dev/sda8 644 0 0 b 8 8
nod /dev/sda9 644 0 0 b 8 9
nod /dev/sda10 644 0 0 b 8 10
nod /dev/sda11 644 0 0 b 8 11
nod /dev/sda12 644 0 0 b 8 12
nod /dev/sda13 644 0 0 b 8 13
nod /dev/sda14 644 0 0 b 8 14
nod /dev/sda15 644 0 0 b 8 15
file /init arch/s390/boot/zfcpdump 755 0 0
file /sbin/e2fsck arch/s390/boot/e2fsck 755 0 0
dir /proc 755 0 0
dir /sys 755 0 0
dir /mnt 755 0 0
dir /sbin 755 0 0
* Issue "make image" to build the zfcpdump image with initramfs.
In a Linux distribution the zfcpdump enabled kernel image must be copied to
/usr/share/zfcpdump/zfcpdump.image, where the s390 zipl tool is looking for the
dump kernel when preparing a SCSI dump disk.
If you use a ramdisk copy it to "/usr/share/zfcpdump/zfcpdump.rd".
For more information on how to use zfcpdump refer to the s390 'Using the Dump
Tools book', which is available from
http://www.ibm.com/developerworks/linux/linux390.

4
Documentation/sh/new-machine.txt
View File

@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ of the board-specific code (with the exception of stboards) ended up
in arch/sh/kernel/ directly, with board-specific headers ending up in
include/asm-sh/. For the new kernel, things are broken out by board type,
companion chip type, and CPU type. Looking at a tree view of this directory
heirarchy looks like the following:
hierarchy looks like the following:
Board-specific code:
@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ overloading), and you can feel free to name the directory after the family
member itself.
There are a few things that each board is required to have, both in the
arch/sh/boards and the include/asm-sh/ heirarchy. In order to better
arch/sh/boards and the include/asm-sh/ hierarchy. In order to better
explain this, we use some examples for adding an imaginary board. For
setup code, we're required at the very least to provide definitions for
get_system_type() and platform_setup(). For our imaginary board, this

117
Documentation/sony-laptop.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
Sony Notebook Control Driver (SNC) Readme
-----------------------------------------
Copyright (C) 2004- 2005 Stelian Pop <stelian@popies.net>
Copyright (C) 2007 Mattia Dongili <malattia@linux.it>
This mini-driver drives the SNC and SPIC device present in the ACPI BIOS of the
Sony Vaio laptops. This driver mixes both devices functions under the same
(hopefully consistent) interface. This also means that the sonypi driver is
obsoleted by sony-laptop now.
Fn keys (hotkeys):
------------------
Some models report hotkeys through the SNC or SPIC devices, such events are
reported both through the ACPI subsystem as acpi events and through the INPUT
subsystem. See the logs of acpid or /proc/acpi/event and
/proc/bus/input/devices to find out what those events are and which input
devices are created by the driver.
Backlight control:
------------------
If your laptop model supports it, you will find sysfs files in the
/sys/class/backlight/sony/
directory. You will be able to query and set the current screen
brightness:
brightness get/set screen brightness (an iteger
between 0 and 7)
actual_brightness reading from this file will query the HW
to get real brightness value
max_brightness the maximum brightness value
Platform specific:
------------------
Loading the sony-laptop module will create a
/sys/devices/platform/sony-laptop/
directory populated with some files.
You then read/write integer values from/to those files by using
standard UNIX tools.
The files are:
brightness_default screen brightness which will be set
when the laptop will be rebooted
cdpower power on/off the internal CD drive
audiopower power on/off the internal sound card
lanpower power on/off the internal ethernet card
(only in debug mode)
bluetoothpower power on/off the internal bluetooth device
fanspeed get/set the fan speed
Note that some files may be missing if they are not supported
by your particular laptop model.
Example usage:
# echo "1" > /sys/devices/platform/sony-laptop/brightness_default
sets the lowest screen brightness for the next and later reboots,
# echo "8" > /sys/devices/platform/sony-laptop/brightness_default
sets the highest screen brightness for the next and later reboots,
# cat /sys/devices/platform/sony-laptop/brightness_default
retrieves the value.
# echo "0" > /sys/devices/platform/sony-laptop/audiopower
powers off the sound card,
# echo "1" > /sys/devices/platform/sony-laptop/audiopower
powers on the sound card.
Development:
------------
If you want to help with the development of this driver (and
you are not afraid of any side effects doing strange things with
your ACPI BIOS could have on your laptop), load the driver and
pass the option 'debug=1'.
REPEAT: DON'T DO THIS IF YOU DON'T LIKE RISKY BUSINESS.
In your kernel logs you will find the list of all ACPI methods
the SNC device has on your laptop. You can see the GCDP/GCDP methods
used to pwer on/off the CD drive, but there are others.
I HAVE NO IDEA WHAT THOSE METHODS DO.
The sony-laptop driver creates, for some of those methods (the most
current ones found on several Vaio models), an entry under
/sys/devices/platform/sony-laptop, just like the 'cdpower' one.
You can create other entries corresponding to your own laptop methods by
further editing the source (see the 'sony_nc_values' table, and add a new
entry to this table with your get/set method names using the
SNC_HANDLE_NAMES macro).
Your mission, should you accept it, is to try finding out what
those entries are for, by reading/writing random values from/to those
files and find out what is the impact on your laptop.
Should you find anything interesting, please report it back to me,
I will not disavow all knowledge of your actions :)
See also http://www.linux.it/~malattia/wiki/index.php/Sony_drivers for other
useful info.
Bugs/Limitations:
-----------------
* This driver is not based on official documentation from Sony
(because there is none), so there is no guarantee this driver
will work at all, or do the right thing. Although this hasn't
happened to me, this driver could do very bad things to your
laptop, including permanent damage.
* The sony-laptop and sonypi drivers do not interact at all. In the
future, sonypi could use sony-laptop to do (part of) its business.
* spicctrl, which is the userspace tool used to communicate with the
sonypi driver (through /dev/sonypi) does not try to use the
sony-laptop driver. In the future, spicctrl could try sonypi first,
and if it isn't present, try sony-laptop instead.

14
Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt
View File

@ -370,7 +370,9 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
mpu_port - 0x300,0x310,0x320,0x330 = legacy port,
1 = integrated PCI port,
0 = disable (default)
fm_port - 0x388 (default), 0 = disable (default)
fm_port - 0x388 = legacy port,
1 = integrated PCI port (default),
0 = disable
soft_ac3 - Software-conversion of raw SPDIF packets (model 033 only)
(default = 1)
joystick_port - Joystick port address (0 = disable, 1 = auto-detect)
@ -864,6 +866,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
basic 3-jack (default)
hp HP nx6320
thinkpad Lenovo Thinkpad T60/X60/Z60
toshiba Toshiba U205
AD1986A
6stack 6-jack, separate surrounds (default)
@ -895,10 +898,17 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
can be adjusted. Appearing only when compiled with
$CONFIG_SND_DEBUG=y
STAC9200/9205/9220/9221/9254
STAC9200/9205/9254
ref Reference board
STAC9220/9221
ref Reference board
3stack D945 3stack
5stack D945 5stack + SPDIF
macmini Intel Mac Mini
macbook Intel Mac Book
macbook-pro-v1 Intel Mac Book Pro 1st generation
macbook-pro Intel Mac Book Pro 2nd generation
STAC9202/9250/9251
ref Reference board, base config

10
Documentation/sparse.txt
View File

@ -45,11 +45,15 @@ special.
Getting sparse
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
With git, you can just get it from
You can get latest released versions from the Sparse homepage at
http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/josh/sparse/
rsync://rsync.kernel.org/pub/scm/devel/sparse/sparse.git
Alternatively, you can get snapshots of the latest development version
of sparse using git to clone..
and DaveJ has tar-balls at
git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/josh/sparse.git
DaveJ has hourly generated tarballs of the git tree available at..
http://www.codemonkey.org.uk/projects/git-snapshots/sparse/

2
Documentation/sysrq.txt
View File

@ -93,6 +93,8 @@ On all - write a character to /proc/sysrq-trigger. e.g.:
'p' - Will dump the current registers and flags to your console.
'q' - Will dump a list of all running timers.
'r' - Turns off keyboard raw mode and sets it to XLATE.
's' - Will attempt to sync all mounted filesystems.

981
Documentation/thinkpad-acpi.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,981 @@
ThinkPad ACPI Extras Driver
Version 0.14
April 21st, 2007
Borislav Deianov <borislav@users.sf.net>
Henrique de Moraes Holschuh <hmh@hmh.eng.br>
http://ibm-acpi.sf.net/
This is a Linux driver for the IBM and Lenovo ThinkPad laptops. It
supports various features of these laptops which are accessible
through the ACPI and ACPI EC framework, but not otherwise fully
supported by the generic Linux ACPI drivers.
This driver used to be named ibm-acpi until kernel 2.6.21 and release
0.13-20070314. It used to be in the drivers/acpi tree, but it was
moved to the drivers/misc tree and renamed to thinkpad-acpi for kernel
2.6.22, and release 0.14.
Status
------
The features currently supported are the following (see below for
detailed description):
- Fn key combinations
- Bluetooth enable and disable
- video output switching, expansion control
- ThinkLight on and off
- limited docking and undocking
- UltraBay eject
- CMOS control
- LED control
- ACPI sounds
- temperature sensors
- Experimental: embedded controller register dump
- LCD brightness control
- Volume control
- Fan control and monitoring: fan speed, fan enable/disable
- Experimental: WAN enable and disable
A compatibility table by model and feature is maintained on the web
site, http://ibm-acpi.sf.net/. I appreciate any success or failure
reports, especially if they add to or correct the compatibility table.
Please include the following information in your report:
- ThinkPad model name
- a copy of your DSDT, from /proc/acpi/dsdt
- a copy of the output of dmidecode, with serial numbers
and UUIDs masked off
- which driver features work and which don't
- the observed behavior of non-working features
Any other comments or patches are also more than welcome.
Installation
------------
If you are compiling this driver as included in the Linux kernel
sources, simply enable the CONFIG_THINKPAD_ACPI option, and optionally
enable the CONFIG_THINKPAD_ACPI_BAY option if you want the
thinkpad-specific bay functionality.
Features
--------
The driver exports two different interfaces to userspace, which can be
used to access the features it provides. One is a legacy procfs-based
interface, which will be removed at some time in the distant future.
The other is a new sysfs-based interface which is not complete yet.
The procfs interface creates the /proc/acpi/ibm directory. There is a
file under that directory for each feature it supports. The procfs
interface is mostly frozen, and will change very little if at all: it
will not be extended to add any new functionality in the driver, instead
all new functionality will be implemented on the sysfs interface.
The sysfs interface tries to blend in the generic Linux sysfs subsystems
and classes as much as possible. Since some of these subsystems are not
yet ready or stabilized, it is expected that this interface will change,
and any and all userspace programs must deal with it.
Notes about the sysfs interface:
Unlike what was done with the procfs interface, correctness when talking
to the sysfs interfaces will be enforced, as will correctness in the
thinkpad-acpi's implementation of sysfs interfaces.
Also, any bugs in the thinkpad-acpi sysfs driver code or in the
thinkpad-acpi's implementation of the sysfs interfaces will be fixed for
maximum correctness, even if that means changing an interface in
non-compatible ways. As these interfaces mature both in the kernel and
in thinkpad-acpi, such changes should become quite rare.
Applications interfacing to the thinkpad-acpi sysfs interfaces must
follow all sysfs guidelines and correctly process all errors (the sysfs
interface makes extensive use of errors). File descriptors and open /
close operations to the sysfs inodes must also be properly implemented.
The version of thinkpad-acpi's sysfs interface is exported by the driver
as a driver attribute (see below).
Sysfs driver attributes are on the driver's sysfs attribute space,
for 2.6.20 this is /sys/bus/platform/drivers/thinkpad-acpi/.
Sysfs device attributes are on the driver's sysfs attribute space,
for 2.6.20 this is /sys/devices/platform/thinkpad-acpi/.
Driver version
--------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/driver
sysfs driver attribute: version
The driver name and version. No commands can be written to this file.
Sysfs interface version
-----------------------
sysfs driver attribute: interface_version
Version of the thinkpad-acpi sysfs interface, as an unsigned long
(output in hex format: 0xAAAABBCC), where:
AAAA - major revision
BB - minor revision
CC - bugfix revision
The sysfs interface version changelog for the driver can be found at the
end of this document. Changes to the sysfs interface done by the kernel
subsystems are not documented here, nor are they tracked by this
attribute.
Hot keys
--------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey
sysfs device attribute: hotkey/*
Without this driver, only the Fn-F4 key (sleep button) generates an
ACPI event. With the driver loaded, the hotkey feature enabled and the
mask set (see below), the various hot keys generate ACPI events in the
following format:
ibm/hotkey HKEY 00000080 0000xxxx
The last four digits vary depending on the key combination pressed.
All labeled Fn-Fx key combinations generate distinct events. In
addition, the lid microswitch and some docking station buttons may
also generate such events.
The bit mask allows some control over which hot keys generate ACPI
events. Not all bits in the mask can be modified. Not all bits that
can be modified do anything. Not all hot keys can be individually
controlled by the mask. Most recent ThinkPad models honor the
following bits (assuming the hot keys feature has been enabled):
key bit behavior when set behavior when unset
Fn-F3 always generates ACPI event
Fn-F4 always generates ACPI event
Fn-F5 0010 generate ACPI event enable/disable Bluetooth
Fn-F7 0040 generate ACPI event switch LCD and external display
Fn-F8 0080 generate ACPI event expand screen or none
Fn-F9 0100 generate ACPI event none
Fn-F12 always generates ACPI event
Some models do not support all of the above. For example, the T30 does
not support Fn-F5 and Fn-F9. Other models do not support the mask at
all. On those models, hot keys cannot be controlled individually.
Note that enabling ACPI events for some keys prevents their default
behavior. For example, if events for Fn-F5 are enabled, that key will
no longer enable/disable Bluetooth by itself. This can still be done
from an acpid handler for the ibm/hotkey event.
Note also that not all Fn key combinations are supported through
ACPI. For example, on the X40, the brightness, volume and "Access IBM"
buttons do not generate ACPI events even with this driver. They *can*
be used through the "ThinkPad Buttons" utility, see
http://www.nongnu.org/tpb/
procfs notes:
The following commands can be written to the /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey file:
echo enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- enable the hot keys feature
echo disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- disable the hot keys feature
echo 0xffff > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- enable all possible hot keys
echo 0x0000 > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- disable all possible hot keys
... any other 4-hex-digit mask ...
echo reset > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- restore the original mask
sysfs notes:
The hot keys attributes are in a hotkey/ subdirectory off the
thinkpad device.
bios_enabled:
Returns the status of the hot keys feature when
thinkpad-acpi was loaded. Upon module unload, the hot
key feature status will be restored to this value.
0: hot keys were disabled
1: hot keys were enabled
bios_mask:
Returns the hot keys mask when thinkpad-acpi was loaded.
Upon module unload, the hot keys mask will be restored
to this value.
enable:
Enables/disables the hot keys feature, and reports
current status of the hot keys feature.
0: disables the hot keys feature / feature disabled
1: enables the hot keys feature / feature enabled
mask:
bit mask to enable ACPI event generation for each hot
key (see above). Returns the current status of the hot
keys mask, and allows one to modify it.
Bluetooth
---------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/bluetooth
sysfs device attribute: bluetooth/enable
This feature shows the presence and current state of a ThinkPad
Bluetooth device in the internal ThinkPad CDC slot.
Procfs notes:
If Bluetooth is installed, the following commands can be used:
echo enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/bluetooth
echo disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/bluetooth
Sysfs notes:
If the Bluetooth CDC card is installed, it can be enabled /
disabled through the "bluetooth/enable" thinkpad-acpi device
attribute, and its current status can also be queried.
enable:
0: disables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is disabled
1: enables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is enabled.
Note: this interface will be probably be superseeded by the
generic rfkill class.
Video output control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/video
--------------------------------------------
This feature allows control over the devices used for video output -
LCD, CRT or DVI (if available). The following commands are available:
echo lcd_enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo lcd_disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo crt_enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo crt_disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo dvi_enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo dvi_disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo auto_enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo auto_disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo expand_toggle > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo video_switch > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
Each video output device can be enabled or disabled individually.
Reading /proc/acpi/ibm/video shows the status of each device.
Automatic video switching can be enabled or disabled. When automatic
video switching is enabled, certain events (e.g. opening the lid,
docking or undocking) cause the video output device to change
automatically. While this can be useful, it also causes flickering
and, on the X40, video corruption. By disabling automatic switching,
the flickering or video corruption can be avoided.
The video_switch command cycles through the available video outputs
(it simulates the behavior of Fn-F7).
Video expansion can be toggled through this feature. This controls
whether the display is expanded to fill the entire LCD screen when a
mode with less than full resolution is used. Note that the current
video expansion status cannot be determined through this feature.
Note that on many models (particularly those using Radeon graphics
chips) the X driver configures the video card in a way which prevents
Fn-F7 from working. This also disables the video output switching
features of this driver, as it uses the same ACPI methods as
Fn-F7. Video switching on the console should still work.
UPDATE: There's now a patch for the X.org Radeon driver which
addresses this issue. Some people are reporting success with the patch
while others are still having problems. For more information:
https://bugs.freedesktop.org/show_bug.cgi?id=2000
ThinkLight control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/light
------------------------------------------
The current status of the ThinkLight can be found in this file. A few
models which do not make the status available will show it as
"unknown". The available commands are:
echo on > /proc/acpi/ibm/light
echo off > /proc/acpi/ibm/light
Docking / undocking -- /proc/acpi/ibm/dock
------------------------------------------
Docking and undocking (e.g. with the X4 UltraBase) requires some
actions to be taken by the operating system to safely make or break
the electrical connections with the dock.
The docking feature of this driver generates the following ACPI events:
ibm/dock GDCK 00000003 00000001 -- eject request
ibm/dock GDCK 00000003 00000002 -- undocked
ibm/dock GDCK 00000000 00000003 -- docked
NOTE: These events will only be generated if the laptop was docked
when originally booted. This is due to the current lack of support for
hot plugging of devices in the Linux ACPI framework. If the laptop was
booted while not in the dock, the following message is shown in the
logs:
Mar 17 01:42:34 aero kernel: thinkpad_acpi: dock device not present
In this case, no dock-related events are generated but the dock and
undock commands described below still work. They can be executed
manually or triggered by Fn key combinations (see the example acpid
configuration files included in the driver tarball package available
on the web site).
When the eject request button on the dock is pressed, the first event
above is generated. The handler for this event should issue the
following command:
echo undock > /proc/acpi/ibm/dock
After the LED on the dock goes off, it is safe to eject the laptop.
Note: if you pressed this key by mistake, go ahead and eject the
laptop, then dock it back in. Otherwise, the dock may not function as
expected.
When the laptop is docked, the third event above is generated. The
handler for this event should issue the following command to fully
enable the dock:
echo dock > /proc/acpi/ibm/dock
The contents of the /proc/acpi/ibm/dock file shows the current status
of the dock, as provided by the ACPI framework.
The docking support in this driver does not take care of enabling or
disabling any other devices you may have attached to the dock. For
example, a CD drive plugged into the UltraBase needs to be disabled or
enabled separately. See the provided example acpid configuration files
for how this can be accomplished.
There is no support yet for PCI devices that may be attached to a
docking station, e.g. in the ThinkPad Dock II. The driver currently
does not recognize, enable or disable such devices. This means that
the only docking stations currently supported are the X-series
UltraBase docks and "dumb" port replicators like the Mini Dock (the
latter don't need any ACPI support, actually).
UltraBay eject -- /proc/acpi/ibm/bay
------------------------------------
Inserting or ejecting an UltraBay device requires some actions to be
taken by the operating system to safely make or break the electrical
connections with the device.
This feature generates the following ACPI events:
ibm/bay MSTR 00000003 00000000 -- eject request
ibm/bay MSTR 00000001 00000000 -- eject lever inserted
NOTE: These events will only be generated if the UltraBay was present
when the laptop was originally booted (on the X series, the UltraBay
is in the dock, so it may not be present if the laptop was undocked).
This is due to the current lack of support for hot plugging of devices
in the Linux ACPI framework. If the laptop was booted without the
UltraBay, the following message is shown in the logs:
Mar 17 01:42:34 aero kernel: thinkpad_acpi: bay device not present
In this case, no bay-related events are generated but the eject
command described below still works. It can be executed manually or
triggered by a hot key combination.
Sliding the eject lever generates the first event shown above. The
handler for this event should take whatever actions are necessary to
shut down the device in the UltraBay (e.g. call idectl), then issue
the following command:
echo eject > /proc/acpi/ibm/bay
After the LED on the UltraBay goes off, it is safe to pull out the
device.
When the eject lever is inserted, the second event above is
generated. The handler for this event should take whatever actions are
necessary to enable the UltraBay device (e.g. call idectl).
The contents of the /proc/acpi/ibm/bay file shows the current status
of the UltraBay, as provided by the ACPI framework.
EXPERIMENTAL warm eject support on the 600e/x, A22p and A3x (To use
this feature, you need to supply the experimental=1 parameter when
loading the module):
These models do not have a button near the UltraBay device to request
a hot eject but rather require the laptop to be put to sleep
(suspend-to-ram) before the bay device is ejected or inserted).
The sequence of steps to eject the device is as follows:
echo eject > /proc/acpi/ibm/bay
put the ThinkPad to sleep
remove the drive
resume from sleep
cat /proc/acpi/ibm/bay should show that the drive was removed
On the A3x, both the UltraBay 2000 and UltraBay Plus devices are
supported. Use "eject2" instead of "eject" for the second bay.
Note: the UltraBay eject support on the 600e/x, A22p and A3x is
EXPERIMENTAL and may not work as expected. USE WITH CAUTION!
CMOS control
------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/cmos
sysfs device attribute: cmos_command
This feature is used internally by the ACPI firmware to control the
ThinkLight on most newer ThinkPad models. It may also control LCD
brightness, sounds volume and more, but only on some models.
The range of valid cmos command numbers is 0 to 21, but not all have an
effect and the behavior varies from model to model. Here is the behavior
on the X40 (tpb is the ThinkPad Buttons utility):
0 - no effect but tpb reports "Volume down"
1 - no effect but tpb reports "Volume up"
2 - no effect but tpb reports "Mute on"
3 - simulate pressing the "Access IBM" button
4 - LCD brightness up
5 - LCD brightness down
11 - toggle screen expansion
12 - ThinkLight on
13 - ThinkLight off
14 - no effect but tpb reports ThinkLight status change
The cmos command interface is prone to firmware split-brain problems, as
in newer ThinkPads it is just a compatibility layer.
LED control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/led
---------------------------------
Some of the LED indicators can be controlled through this feature. The
available commands are:
echo '<led number> on' >/proc/acpi/ibm/led
echo '<led number> off' >/proc/acpi/ibm/led
echo '<led number> blink' >/proc/acpi/ibm/led
The <led number> range is 0 to 7. The set of LEDs that can be
controlled varies from model to model. Here is the mapping on the X40:
0 - power
1 - battery (orange)
2 - battery (green)
3 - UltraBase
4 - UltraBay
7 - standby
All of the above can be turned on and off and can be made to blink.
ACPI sounds -- /proc/acpi/ibm/beep
----------------------------------
The BEEP method is used internally by the ACPI firmware to provide
audible alerts in various situations. This feature allows the same
sounds to be triggered manually.
The commands are non-negative integer numbers:
echo <number> >/proc/acpi/ibm/beep
The valid <number> range is 0 to 17. Not all numbers trigger sounds
and the sounds vary from model to model. Here is the behavior on the
X40:
0 - stop a sound in progress (but use 17 to stop 16)
2 - two beeps, pause, third beep ("low battery")
3 - single beep
4 - high, followed by low-pitched beep ("unable")
5 - single beep
6 - very high, followed by high-pitched beep ("AC/DC")
7 - high-pitched beep
9 - three short beeps
10 - very long beep
12 - low-pitched beep
15 - three high-pitched beeps repeating constantly, stop with 0
16 - one medium-pitched beep repeating constantly, stop with 17
17 - stop 16
Temperature sensors
-------------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/thermal
sysfs device attributes: (hwmon) temp*_input
Most ThinkPads include six or more separate temperature sensors but
only expose the CPU temperature through the standard ACPI methods.
This feature shows readings from up to eight different sensors on older
ThinkPads, and it has experimental support for up to sixteen different
sensors on newer ThinkPads.
EXPERIMENTAL: The 16-sensors feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because the
implementation directly accesses hardware registers and may not work as
expected. USE WITH CAUTION! To use this feature, you need to supply the
experimental=1 parameter when loading the module. When EXPERIMENTAL
mode is enabled, reading the first 8 sensors on newer ThinkPads will
also use an new experimental thermal sensor access mode.
For example, on the X40, a typical output may be:
temperatures: 42 42 45 41 36 -128 33 -128
EXPERIMENTAL: On the T43/p, a typical output may be:
temperatures: 48 48 36 52 38 -128 31 -128 48 52 48 -128 -128 -128 -128 -128
The mapping of thermal sensors to physical locations varies depending on
system-board model (and thus, on ThinkPad model).
http://thinkwiki.org/wiki/Thermal_Sensors is a public wiki page that
tries to track down these locations for various models.
Most (newer?) models seem to follow this pattern:
1: CPU
2: (depends on model)
3: (depends on model)
4: GPU
5: Main battery: main sensor
6: Bay battery: main sensor
7: Main battery: secondary sensor
8: Bay battery: secondary sensor
9-15: (depends on model)
For the R51 (source: Thomas Gruber):
2: Mini-PCI
3: Internal HDD
For the T43, T43/p (source: Shmidoax/Thinkwiki.org)
http://thinkwiki.org/wiki/Thermal_Sensors#ThinkPad_T43.2C_T43p
2: System board, left side (near PCMCIA slot), reported as HDAPS temp
3: PCMCIA slot
9: MCH (northbridge) to DRAM Bus
10: ICH (southbridge), under Mini-PCI card, under touchpad
11: Power regulator, underside of system board, below F2 key
The A31 has a very atypical layout for the thermal sensors
(source: Milos Popovic, http://thinkwiki.org/wiki/Thermal_Sensors#ThinkPad_A31)
1: CPU
2: Main Battery: main sensor
3: Power Converter
4: Bay Battery: main sensor
5: MCH (northbridge)
6: PCMCIA/ambient
7: Main Battery: secondary sensor
8: Bay Battery: secondary sensor
Procfs notes:
Readings from sensors that are not available return -128.
No commands can be written to this file.
Sysfs notes:
Sensors that are not available return the ENXIO error. This
status may change at runtime, as there are hotplug thermal
sensors, like those inside the batteries and docks.
thinkpad-acpi thermal sensors are reported through the hwmon
subsystem, and follow all of the hwmon guidelines at
Documentation/hwmon.
EXPERIMENTAL: Embedded controller register dump -- /proc/acpi/ibm/ecdump
------------------------------------------------------------------------
This feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because the implementation
directly accesses hardware registers and may not work as expected. USE
WITH CAUTION! To use this feature, you need to supply the
experimental=1 parameter when loading the module.
This feature dumps the values of 256 embedded controller
registers. Values which have changed since the last time the registers
were dumped are marked with a star:
[root@x40 ibm-acpi]# cat /proc/acpi/ibm/ecdump
EC +00 +01 +02 +03 +04 +05 +06 +07 +08 +09 +0a +0b +0c +0d +0e +0f
EC 0x00: a7 47 87 01 fe 96 00 08 01 00 cb 00 00 00 40 00
EC 0x10: 00 00 ff ff f4 3c 87 09 01 ff 42 01 ff ff 0d 00
EC 0x20: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 43 00 00 80
EC 0x30: 01 07 1a 00 30 04 00 00 *85 00 00 10 00 50 00 00
EC 0x40: 00 00 00 00 00 00 14 01 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0x50: 00 c0 02 0d 00 01 01 02 02 03 03 03 03 *bc *02 *bc
EC 0x60: *02 *bc *02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0x70: 00 00 00 00 00 12 30 40 *24 *26 *2c *27 *20 80 *1f 80
EC 0x80: 00 00 00 06 *37 *0e 03 00 00 00 0e 07 00 00 00 00
EC 0x90: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0xa0: *ff 09 ff 09 ff ff *64 00 *00 *00 *a2 41 *ff *ff *e0 00
EC 0xb0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0xc0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0xd0: 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0xe0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 11 20 49 04 24 06 55 03
EC 0xf0: 31 55 48 54 35 38 57 57 08 2f 45 73 07 65 6c 1a
This feature can be used to determine the register holding the fan
speed on some models. To do that, do the following:
- make sure the battery is fully charged
- make sure the fan is running
- run 'cat /proc/acpi/ibm/ecdump' several times, once per second or so
The first step makes sure various charging-related values don't
vary. The second ensures that the fan-related values do vary, since
the fan speed fluctuates a bit. The third will (hopefully) mark the
fan register with a star:
[root@x40 ibm-acpi]# cat /proc/acpi/ibm/ecdump
EC +00 +01 +02 +03 +04 +05 +06 +07 +08 +09 +0a +0b +0c +0d +0e +0f
EC 0x00: a7 47 87 01 fe 96 00 08 01 00 cb 00 00 00 40 00
EC 0x10: 00 00 ff ff f4 3c 87 09 01 ff 42 01 ff ff 0d 00
EC 0x20: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 43 00 00 80
EC 0x30: 01 07 1a 00 30 04 00 00 85 00 00 10 00 50 00 00
EC 0x40: 00 00 00 00 00 00 14 01 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0x50: 00 c0 02 0d 00 01 01 02 02 03 03 03 03 bc 02 bc
EC 0x60: 02 bc 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0x70: 00 00 00 00 00 12 30 40 24 27 2c 27 21 80 1f 80
EC 0x80: 00 00 00 06 *be 0d 03 00 00 00 0e 07 00 00 00 00
EC 0x90: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0xa0: ff 09 ff 09 ff ff 64 00 00 00 a2 41 ff ff e0 00
EC 0xb0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0xc0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0xd0: 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
EC 0xe0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 11 20 49 04 24 06 55 03
EC 0xf0: 31 55 48 54 35 38 57 57 08 2f 45 73 07 65 6c 1a
Another set of values that varies often is the temperature
readings. Since temperatures don't change vary fast, you can take
several quick dumps to eliminate them.
You can use a similar method to figure out the meaning of other
embedded controller registers - e.g. make sure nothing else changes
except the charging or discharging battery to determine which
registers contain the current battery capacity, etc. If you experiment
with this, do send me your results (including some complete dumps with
a description of the conditions when they were taken.)
LCD brightness control
----------------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/brightness
sysfs backlight device "thinkpad_screen"
This feature allows software control of the LCD brightness on ThinkPad
models which don't have a hardware brightness slider.
It has some limitations: the LCD backlight cannot be actually turned on or off
by this interface, and in many ThinkPad models, the "dim while on battery"
functionality will be enabled by the BIOS when this interface is used, and
cannot be controlled.
The backlight control has eight levels, ranging from 0 to 7. Some of the
levels may not be distinct.
Procfs notes:
The available commands are:
echo up >/proc/acpi/ibm/brightness
echo down >/proc/acpi/ibm/brightness
echo 'level <level>' >/proc/acpi/ibm/brightness
Sysfs notes:
The interface is implemented through the backlight sysfs class, which is poorly
documented at this time.
Locate the thinkpad_screen device under /sys/class/backlight, and inside it
there will be the following attributes:
max_brightness:
Reads the maximum brightness the hardware can be set to.
The minimum is always zero.
actual_brightness:
Reads what brightness the screen is set to at this instant.
brightness:
Writes request the driver to change brightness to the given
value. Reads will tell you what brightness the driver is trying
to set the display to when "power" is set to zero and the display
has not been dimmed by a kernel power management event.
power:
power management mode, where 0 is "display on", and 1 to 3 will
dim the display backlight to brightness level 0 because
thinkpad-acpi cannot really turn the backlight off. Kernel
power management events can temporarily increase the current
power management level, i.e. they can dim the display.
Volume control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/volume
---------------------------------------
This feature allows volume control on ThinkPad models which don't have
a hardware volume knob. The available commands are:
echo up >/proc/acpi/ibm/volume
echo down >/proc/acpi/ibm/volume
echo mute >/proc/acpi/ibm/volume
echo 'level <level>' >/proc/acpi/ibm/volume
The <level> number range is 0 to 15 although not all of them may be
distinct. The unmute the volume after the mute command, use either the
up or down command (the level command will not unmute the volume).
The current volume level and mute state is shown in the file.
Fan control and monitoring: fan speed, fan enable/disable
---------------------------------------------------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/fan
sysfs device attributes: (hwmon) fan_input, pwm1, pwm1_enable
NOTE NOTE NOTE: fan control operations are disabled by default for
safety reasons. To enable them, the module parameter "fan_control=1"
must be given to thinkpad-acpi.
This feature attempts to show the current fan speed, control mode and
other fan data that might be available. The speed is read directly
from the hardware registers of the embedded controller. This is known
to work on later R, T, X and Z series ThinkPads but may show a bogus
value on other models.
Fan levels:
Most ThinkPad fans work in "levels" at the firmware interface. Level 0
stops the fan. The higher the level, the higher the fan speed, although
adjacent levels often map to the same fan speed. 7 is the highest
level, where the fan reaches the maximum recommended speed.
Level "auto" means the EC changes the fan level according to some
internal algorithm, usually based on readings from the thermal sensors.
There is also a "full-speed" level, also known as "disengaged" level.
In this level, the EC disables the speed-locked closed-loop fan control,
and drives the fan as fast as it can go, which might exceed hardware
limits, so use this level with caution.
The fan usually ramps up or down slowly from one speed to another, and
it is normal for the EC to take several seconds to react to fan
commands. The full-speed level may take up to two minutes to ramp up to
maximum speed, and in some ThinkPads, the tachometer readings go stale
while the EC is transitioning to the full-speed level.
WARNING WARNING WARNING: do not leave the fan disabled unless you are
monitoring all of the temperature sensor readings and you are ready to
enable it if necessary to avoid overheating.
An enabled fan in level "auto" may stop spinning if the EC decides the
ThinkPad is cool enough and doesn't need the extra airflow. This is
normal, and the EC will spin the fan up if the varios thermal readings
rise too much.
On the X40, this seems to depend on the CPU and HDD temperatures.
Specifically, the fan is turned on when either the CPU temperature
climbs to 56 degrees or the HDD temperature climbs to 46 degrees. The
fan is turned off when the CPU temperature drops to 49 degrees and the
HDD temperature drops to 41 degrees. These thresholds cannot
currently be controlled.
The ThinkPad's ACPI DSDT code will reprogram the fan on its own when
certain conditions are met. It will override any fan programming done
through thinkpad-acpi.
The thinkpad-acpi kernel driver can be programmed to revert the fan
level to a safe setting if userspace does not issue one of the procfs
fan commands: "enable", "disable", "level" or "watchdog", or if there
are no writes to pwm1_enable (or to pwm1 *if and only if* pwm1_enable is
set to 1, manual mode) within a configurable amount of time of up to
120 seconds. This functionality is called fan safety watchdog.
Note that the watchdog timer stops after it enables the fan. It will be
rearmed again automatically (using the same interval) when one of the
above mentioned fan commands is received. The fan watchdog is,
therefore, not suitable to protect against fan mode changes made through
means other than the "enable", "disable", and "level" procfs fan
commands, or the hwmon fan control sysfs interface.
Procfs notes:
The fan may be enabled or disabled with the following commands:
echo enable >/proc/acpi/ibm/fan
echo disable >/proc/acpi/ibm/fan
Placing a fan on level 0 is the same as disabling it. Enabling a fan
will try to place it in a safe level if it is too slow or disabled.
The fan level can be controlled with the command:
echo 'level <level>' > /proc/acpi/ibm/fan
Where <level> is an integer from 0 to 7, or one of the words "auto" or
"full-speed" (without the quotes). Not all ThinkPads support the "auto"
and "full-speed" levels. The driver accepts "disengaged" as an alias for
"full-speed", and reports it as "disengaged" for backwards
compatibility.
On the X31 and X40 (and ONLY on those models), the fan speed can be
controlled to a certain degree. Once the fan is running, it can be
forced to run faster or slower with the following command:
echo 'speed <speed>' > /proc/acpi/ibm/fan
The sustainable range of fan speeds on the X40 appears to be from about
3700 to about 7350. Values outside this range either do not have any
effect or the fan speed eventually settles somewhere in that range. The
fan cannot be stopped or started with this command. This functionality
is incomplete, and not available through the sysfs interface.
To program the safety watchdog, use the "watchdog" command.
echo 'watchdog <interval in seconds>' > /proc/acpi/ibm/fan
If you want to disable the watchdog, use 0 as the interval.
Sysfs notes:
The sysfs interface follows the hwmon subsystem guidelines for the most
part, and the exception is the fan safety watchdog.
Writes to any of the sysfs attributes may return the EINVAL error if
that operation is not supported in a given ThinkPad or if the parameter
is out-of-bounds, and EPERM if it is forbidden. They may also return
EINTR (interrupted system call), and EIO (I/O error while trying to talk
to the firmware).
Features not yet implemented by the driver return ENOSYS.
hwmon device attribute pwm1_enable:
0: PWM offline (fan is set to full-speed mode)
1: Manual PWM control (use pwm1 to set fan level)
2: Hardware PWM control (EC "auto" mode)
3: reserved (Software PWM control, not implemented yet)
Modes 0 and 2 are not supported by all ThinkPads, and the
driver is not always able to detect this. If it does know a
mode is unsupported, it will return -EINVAL.
hwmon device attribute pwm1:
Fan level, scaled from the firmware values of 0-7 to the hwmon
scale of 0-255. 0 means fan stopped, 255 means highest normal
speed (level 7).
This attribute only commands the fan if pmw1_enable is set to 1
(manual PWM control).
hwmon device attribute fan1_input:
Fan tachometer reading, in RPM. May go stale on certain
ThinkPads while the EC transitions the PWM to offline mode,
which can take up to two minutes. May return rubbish on older
ThinkPads.
driver attribute fan_watchdog:
Fan safety watchdog timer interval, in seconds. Minimum is
1 second, maximum is 120 seconds. 0 disables the watchdog.
To stop the fan: set pwm1 to zero, and pwm1_enable to 1.
To start the fan in a safe mode: set pwm1_enable to 2. If that fails
with EINVAL, try to set pwm1_enable to 1 and pwm1 to at least 128 (255
would be the safest choice, though).
EXPERIMENTAL: WAN
-----------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/wan
sysfs device attribute: wwan/enable
This feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because the implementation
directly accesses hardware registers and may not work as expected. USE
WITH CAUTION! To use this feature, you need to supply the
experimental=1 parameter when loading the module.
This feature shows the presence and current state of a W-WAN (Sierra
Wireless EV-DO) device.
It was tested on a Lenovo Thinkpad X60. It should probably work on other
Thinkpad models which come with this module installed.
Procfs notes:
If the W-WAN card is installed, the following commands can be used:
echo enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/wan
echo disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/wan
Sysfs notes:
If the W-WAN card is installed, it can be enabled /
disabled through the "wwan/enable" thinkpad-acpi device
attribute, and its current status can also be queried.
enable:
0: disables WWAN card / WWAN card is disabled
1: enables WWAN card / WWAN card is enabled.
Note: this interface will be probably be superseeded by the
generic rfkill class.
Multiple Commands, Module Parameters
------------------------------------
Multiple commands can be written to the proc files in one shot by
separating them with commas, for example:
echo enable,0xffff > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey
echo lcd_disable,crt_enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
Commands can also be specified when loading the thinkpad-acpi module,
for example:
modprobe thinkpad_acpi hotkey=enable,0xffff video=auto_disable
Enabling debugging output
-------------------------
The module takes a debug paramater which can be used to selectively
enable various classes of debugging output, for example:
modprobe ibm_acpi debug=0xffff
will enable all debugging output classes. It takes a bitmask, so
to enable more than one output class, just add their values.
Debug bitmask Description
0x0001 Initialization and probing
0x0002 Removal
There is also a kernel build option to enable more debugging
information, which may be necessary to debug driver problems.
The level of debugging information output by the driver can be changed
at runtime through sysfs, using the driver attribute debug_level. The
attribute takes the same bitmask as the debug module parameter above.
Force loading of module
-----------------------
If thinkpad-acpi refuses to detect your ThinkPad, you can try to specify
the module parameter force_load=1. Regardless of whether this works or
not, please contact ibm-acpi-devel@lists.sourceforge.net with a report.
Sysfs interface changelog:
0x000100: Initial sysfs support, as a single platform driver and
device.

80
Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt
View File

@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ situation as with tcpdump.
Unlike the packet socket, usbmon has an interface which provides traces
in a text format. This is used for two purposes. First, it serves as a
common trace exchange format for tools while most sophisticated formats
common trace exchange format for tools while more sophisticated formats
are finalized. Second, humans can read it in case tools are not available.
To collect a raw text trace, execute following steps.
@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ if usbmon is built into the kernel.
Verify that bus sockets are present.
# ls /sys/kernel/debug/usbmon
1s 1t 2s 2t 3s 3t 4s 4t
1s 1t 1u 2s 2t 2u 3s 3t 3u 4s 4t 4u
#
2. Find which bus connects to the desired device
@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Bus=03 means it's bus 3.
3. Start 'cat'
# cat /sys/kernel/debug/usbmon/3t > /tmp/1.mon.out
# cat /sys/kernel/debug/usbmon/3u > /tmp/1.mon.out
This process will be reading until killed. Naturally, the output can be
redirected to a desirable location. This is preferred, because it is going
@ -75,46 +75,80 @@ that the file size is not excessive for your favourite editor.
* Raw text data format
The '1t' type data consists of a stream of events, such as URB submission,
Two formats are supported currently: the original, or '1t' format, and
the '1u' format. The '1t' format is deprecated in kernel 2.6.21. The '1u'
format adds a few fields, such as ISO frame descriptors, interval, etc.
It produces slightly longer lines, but otherwise is a perfect superset
of '1t' format.
If it is desired to recognize one from the other in a program, look at the
"address" word (see below), where '1u' format adds a bus number. If 2 colons
are present, it's the '1t' format, otherwise '1u'.
Any text format data consists of a stream of events, such as URB submission,
URB callback, submission error. Every event is a text line, which consists
of whitespace separated words. The number or position of words may depend
on the event type, but there is a set of words, common for all types.
Here is the list of words, from left to right:
- URB Tag. This is used to identify URBs is normally a kernel mode address
of the URB structure in hexadecimal.
- Timestamp in microseconds, a decimal number. The timestamp's resolution
depends on available clock, and so it can be much worse than a microsecond
(if the implementation uses jiffies, for example).
- Event Type. This type refers to the format of the event, not URB type.
Available types are: S - submission, C - callback, E - submission error.
- "Pipe". The pipe concept is deprecated. This is a composite word, used to
be derived from information in pipes. It consists of three fields, separated
by colons: URB type and direction, Device address, Endpoint number.
- "Address" word (formerly a "pipe"). It consists of four fields, separated by
colons: URB type and direction, Bus number, Device address, Endpoint number.
Type and direction are encoded with two bytes in the following manner:
Ci Co Control input and output
Zi Zo Isochronous input and output
Ii Io Interrupt input and output
Bi Bo Bulk input and output
Device address and Endpoint number are 3-digit and 2-digit (respectively)
decimal numbers, with leading zeroes.
- URB Status. In most cases, this field contains a number, sometimes negative,
which represents a "status" field of the URB. This field makes no sense for
submissions, but is present anyway to help scripts with parsing. When an
error occurs, the field contains the error code. In case of a submission of
a Control packet, this field contains a Setup Tag instead of an error code.
It is easy to tell whether the Setup Tag is present because it is never a
number. Thus if scripts find a number in this field, they proceed to read
Data Length. If they find something else, like a letter, they read the setup
packet before reading the Data Length.
Bus number, Device address, and Endpoint are decimal numbers, but they may
have leading zeros, for the sake of human readers.
- URB Status word. This is either a letter, or several numbers separated
by colons: URB status, interval, start frame, and error count. Unlike the
"address" word, all fields save the status are optional. Interval is printed
only for interrupt and isochronous URBs. Start frame is printed only for
isochronous URBs. Error count is printed only for isochronous callback
events.
The status field is a decimal number, sometimes negative, which represents
a "status" field of the URB. This field makes no sense for submissions, but
is present anyway to help scripts with parsing. When an error occurs, the
field contains the error code.
In case of a submission of a Control packet, this field contains a Setup Tag
instead of an group of numbers. It is easy to tell whether the Setup Tag is
present because it is never a number. Thus if scripts find a set of numbers
in this word, they proceed to read Data Length (except for isochronous URBs).
If they find something else, like a letter, they read the setup packet before
reading the Data Length or isochronous descriptors.
- Setup packet, if present, consists of 5 words: one of each for bmRequestType,
bRequest, wValue, wIndex, wLength, as specified by the USB Specification 2.0.
These words are safe to decode if Setup Tag was 's'. Otherwise, the setup
packet was present, but not captured, and the fields contain filler.
- Number of isochronous frame descriptors and descriptors themselves.
If an Isochronous transfer event has a set of descriptors, a total number
of them in an URB is printed first, then a word per descriptor, up to a
total of 5. The word consists of 3 colon-separated decimal numbers for
status, offset, and length respectively. For submissions, initial length
is reported. For callbacks, actual length is reported.
- Data Length. For submissions, this is the requested length. For callbacks,
this is the actual length.
- Data tag. The usbmon may not always capture data, even if length is nonzero.
The data words are present only if this tag is '='.
- Data words follow, in big endian hexadecimal format. Notice that they are
not machine words, but really just a byte stream split into words to make
it easier to read. Thus, the last word may contain from one to four bytes.
@ -153,20 +187,18 @@ class ParsedLine {
}
}
This format may be changed in the future.
Examples:
An input control transfer to get a port status.
d5ea89a0 3575914555 S Ci:001:00 s a3 00 0000 0003 0004 4 <
d5ea89a0 3575914560 C Ci:001:00 0 4 = 01050000
d5ea89a0 3575914555 S Ci:1:001:0 s a3 00 0000 0003 0004 4 <
d5ea89a0 3575914560 C Ci:1:001:0 0 4 = 01050000
An output bulk transfer to send a SCSI command 0x5E in a 31-byte Bulk wrapper
to a storage device at address 5:
dd65f0e8 4128379752 S Bo:005:02 -115 31 = 55534243 5e000000 00000000 00000600 00000000 00000000 00000000 000000
dd65f0e8 4128379808 C Bo:005:02 0 31 >
dd65f0e8 4128379752 S Bo:1:005:2 -115 31 = 55534243 5e000000 00000000 00000600 00000000 00000000 00000000 000000
dd65f0e8 4128379808 C Bo:1:005:2 0 31 >
* Raw binary format and API

4
Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.bttv
View File

@ -126,7 +126,7 @@
125 -> MATRIX Vision Sigma-SQ
126 -> MATRIX Vision Sigma-SLC
127 -> APAC Viewcomp 878(AMAX)
128 -> DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Lite [18ac:db10]
128 -> DViCO FusionHDTV DVB-T Lite [18ac:db10,18ac:db11]
129 -> V-Gear MyVCD
130 -> Super TV Tuner
131 -> Tibet Systems 'Progress DVR' CS16
@ -143,3 +143,5 @@
142 -> Sabrent TV-FM (bttv version)
143 -> Hauppauge ImpactVCB (bt878) [0070:13eb]
144 -> MagicTV
145 -> SSAI Security Video Interface [4149:5353]
146 -> SSAI Ultrasound Video Interface [414a:5353]

2
Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx88
View File

@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
36 -> AVerTV 303 (M126) [1461:000a]
37 -> Hauppauge Nova-S-Plus DVB-S [0070:9201,0070:9202]
38 -> Hauppauge Nova-SE2 DVB-S [0070:9200]
39 -> KWorld DVB-S 100 [17de:08b2]
39 -> KWorld DVB-S 100 [17de:08b2,1421:0341]
40 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1100 DVB-T/Hybrid [0070:9400,0070:9402]
41 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1100 DVB-T/Hybrid (Low Profile) [0070:9800,0070:9802]
42 -> digitalnow DNTV Live! DVB-T Pro [1822:0025,1822:0019]

18
Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.ivtv Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
1 -> Hauppauge WinTV PVR-250
2 -> Hauppauge WinTV PVR-350
3 -> Hauppauge WinTV PVR-150 or PVR-500
4 -> AVerMedia M179 [1461:a3ce,1461:a3cf]
5 -> Yuan MPG600/Kuroutoshikou iTVC16-STVLP [12ab:fff3,12ab:ffff]
6 -> Yuan MPG160/Kuroutoshikou iTVC15-STVLP [12ab:0000,10fc:40a0]
7 -> Yuan PG600/DiamondMM PVR-550 [ff92:0070,ffab:0600]
8 -> Adaptec AVC-2410 [9005:0093]
9 -> Adaptec AVC-2010 [9005:0092]
10 -> NAGASE TRANSGEAR 5000TV [1461:bfff]
11 -> AOpen VA2000MAX-STN6 [0000:ff5f]
12 -> YUAN MPG600GR/Kuroutoshikou CX23416GYC-STVLP [12ab:0600,fbab:0600,1154:0523]
13 -> I/O Data GV-MVP/RX [10fc:d01e,10fc:d038,10fc:d039]
14 -> I/O Data GV-MVP/RX2E [10fc:d025]
15 -> GOTVIEW PCI DVD (partial support only) [12ab:0600]
16 -> GOTVIEW PCI DVD2 Deluxe [ffac:0600]
17 -> Yuan MPC622 [ff01:d998]
18 -> Digital Cowboy DCT-MTVP1 [1461:bfff]

11
Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
View File

@ -53,7 +53,7 @@
52 -> AverMedia AverTV/305 [1461:2108]
53 -> ASUS TV-FM 7135 [1043:4845]
54 -> LifeView FlyTV Platinum FM / Gold [5168:0214,1489:0214,5168:0304]
55 -> LifeView FlyDVB-T DUO [5168:0306]
55 -> LifeView FlyDVB-T DUO / MSI TV@nywhere Duo [5168:0306,4E42:0306]
56 -> Avermedia AVerTV 307 [1461:a70a]
57 -> Avermedia AVerTV GO 007 FM [1461:f31f]
58 -> ADS Tech Instant TV (saa7135) [1421:0350,1421:0351,1421:0370,1421:1370]
@ -76,7 +76,7 @@
75 -> AVerMedia AVerTVHD MCE A180 [1461:1044]
76 -> SKNet MonsterTV Mobile [1131:4ee9]
77 -> Pinnacle PCTV 40i/50i/110i (saa7133) [11bd:002e]
78 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Dual [1043:4862,1043:4876]
78 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Dual [1043:4862,1043:4857]
79 -> Sedna/MuchTV PC TV Cardbus TV/Radio (ITO25 Rev:2B)
80 -> ASUS Digimatrix TV [1043:0210]
81 -> Philips Tiger reference design [1131:2018]
@ -104,3 +104,10 @@
103 -> Compro Videomate DVB-T200A
104 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1110 DVB-T/Hybrid [0070:6701]
105 -> Terratec Cinergy HT PCMCIA [153b:1172]
106 -> Encore ENLTV [1131:2342,1131:2341,3016:2344]
107 -> Encore ENLTV-FM [1131:230f]
108 -> Terratec Cinergy HT PCI [153b:1175]
109 -> Philips Tiger - S Reference design
110 -> Avermedia M102 [1461:f31e]
111 -> ASUS P7131 4871 [1043:4871]
112 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Hybrid [1043:4876]

64
Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.usbvision Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
0 -> Xanboo [0a6f:0400]
1 -> Belkin USB VideoBus II Adapter [050d:0106]
2 -> Belkin Components USB VideoBus [050d:0207]
3 -> Belkin USB VideoBus II [050d:0208]
4 -> echoFX InterView Lite [0571:0002]
5 -> USBGear USBG-V1 resp. HAMA USB [0573:0003]
6 -> D-Link V100 [0573:0400]
7 -> X10 USB Camera [0573:2000]
8 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Live (PAL B/G) [0573:2d00]
9 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Live Pro (NTSC M/N) [0573:2d01]
10 -> Zoran Co. PMD (Nogatech) AV-grabber Manhattan [0573:2101]
11 -> Nogatech USB-TV (NTSC) FM [0573:4100]
12 -> PNY USB-TV (NTSC) FM [0573:4110]
13 -> PixelView PlayTv-USB PRO (PAL) FM [0573:4450]
14 -> ZTV ZT-721 2.4GHz USB A/V Receiver [0573:4550]
15 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB (NTSC M/N) [0573:4d00]
16 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB (PAL B/G) [0573:4d01]
17 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB (PAL I) [0573:4d02]
18 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB (PAL/SECAM L) [0573:4d03]
19 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB (PAL D/K) [0573:4d04]
20 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB (NTSC FM) [0573:4d10]
21 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB (PAL B/G FM) [0573:4d11]
22 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB (PAL I FM) [0573:4d12]
23 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB (PAL D/K FM) [0573:4d14]
24 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (NTSC M/N) [0573:4d2a]
25 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (NTSC M/N) V2 [0573:4d2b]
26 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (PAL/SECAM B/G/I/D/K/L) [0573:4d2c]
27 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (NTSC M/N) V3 [0573:4d20]
28 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (PAL B/G) [0573:4d21]
29 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (PAL I) [0573:4d22]
30 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (PAL/SECAM L) [0573:4d23]
31 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (PAL D/K) [0573:4d24]
32 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (PAL/SECAM BGDK/I/L) [0573:4d25]
33 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (PAL/SECAM BGDK/I/L) V2 [0573:4d26]
34 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (PAL B/G) V2 [0573:4d27]
35 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (PAL B/G,D/K) [0573:4d28]
36 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (PAL I,D/K) [0573:4d29]
37 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (NTSC M/N FM) [0573:4d30]
38 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (PAL B/G FM) [0573:4d31]
39 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (PAL I FM) [0573:4d32]
40 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (PAL D/K FM) [0573:4d34]
41 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (Temic PAL/SECAM B/G/I/D/K/L FM) [0573:4d35]
42 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (Temic PAL B/G FM) [0573:4d36]
43 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (PAL/SECAM B/G/I/D/K/L FM) [0573:4d37]
44 -> Hauppauge WinTV USB Pro (NTSC M/N FM) V2 [0573:4d38]
45 -> Camtel Technology USB TV Genie Pro FM Model TVB330 [0768:0006]
46 -> Digital Video Creator I [07d0:0001]
47 -> Global Village GV-007 (NTSC) [07d0:0002]
48 -> Dazzle Fusion Model DVC-50 Rev 1 (NTSC) [07d0:0003]
49 -> Dazzle Fusion Model DVC-80 Rev 1 (PAL) [07d0:0004]
50 -> Dazzle Fusion Model DVC-90 Rev 1 (SECAM) [07d0:0005]
51 -> Eskape Labs MyTV2Go [07f8:9104]
52 -> Pinnacle Studio PCTV USB (PAL) [2304:010d]
53 -> Pinnacle Studio PCTV USB (SECAM) [2304:0109]
54 -> Pinnacle Studio PCTV USB (PAL) FM [2304:0110]
55 -> Miro PCTV USB [2304:0111]
56 -> Pinnacle Studio PCTV USB (NTSC) FM [2304:0112]
57 -> Pinnacle Studio PCTV USB (PAL) FM V2 [2304:0210]
58 -> Pinnacle Studio PCTV USB (NTSC) FM V2 [2304:0212]
59 -> Pinnacle Studio PCTV USB (PAL) FM V3 [2304:0214]
60 -> Pinnacle Studio Linx Video input cable (NTSC) [2304:0300]
61 -> Pinnacle Studio Linx Video input cable (PAL) [2304:0301]
62 -> Pinnacle PCTV Bungee USB (PAL) FM [2304:0419]
63 -> Hauppauge WinTv-USB [2400:4200]

6
Documentation/video4linux/CQcam.txt
View File

@ -197,10 +197,10 @@ Use the ../../Maintainers file, particularly the VIDEO FOR LINUX and PARALLEL
PORT SUPPORT sections
The video4linux page:
http://roadrunner.swansea.linux.org.uk/v4l.shtml
http://linuxtv.org
The video4linux2 page:
http://millennium.diads.com/bdirks/v4l2.htm
The V4L2 API spec:
http://v4l2spec.bytesex.org/
Some web pages about the quickcams:
http://www.dkfz-heidelberg.de/Macromol/wedemann/mini-HOWTO-cqcam.html

187
Documentation/video4linux/README.ivtv Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,187 @@
ivtv release notes
==================
This is a v4l2 device driver for the Conexant cx23415/6 MPEG encoder/decoder.
The cx23415 can do both encoding and decoding, the cx23416 can only do MPEG
encoding. Currently the only card featuring full decoding support is the
Hauppauge PVR-350.
NOTE: this driver requires the latest encoder firmware (version 2.06.039, size
376836 bytes). Get the firmware from here:
http://dl.ivtvdriver.org/ivtv/firmware/firmware.tar.gz
NOTE: 'normal' TV applications do not work with this driver, you need
an application that can handle MPEG input such as mplayer, xine, MythTV,
etc.
The primary goal of the IVTV project is to provide a "clean room" Linux
Open Source driver implementation for video capture cards based on the
iCompression iTVC15 or Conexant CX23415/CX23416 MPEG Codec.
Features:
* Hardware mpeg2 capture of broadcast video (and sound) via the tuner or
S-Video/Composite and audio line-in.
* Hardware mpeg2 capture of FM radio where hardware support exists
* Supports NTSC, PAL, SECAM with stereo sound
* Supports SAP and bilingual transmissions.
* Supports raw VBI (closed captions and teletext).
* Supports sliced VBI (closed captions and teletext) and is able to insert
this into the captured MPEG stream.
* Supports raw YUV and PCM input.
Additional features for the PVR-350 (CX23415 based):
* Provides hardware mpeg2 playback
* Provides comprehensive OSD (On Screen Display: ie. graphics overlaying the
video signal)
* Provides a framebuffer (allowing X applications to appear on the video
device) (this framebuffer is not yet part of the kernel. In the meantime it
is available from www.ivtvdriver.org).
* Supports raw YUV output.
IMPORTANT: In case of problems first read this page:
http://www.ivtvdriver.org/index.php/Troubleshooting
See also:
Homepage + Wiki
http://www.ivtvdriver.org
IRC
irc://irc.freenode.net/ivtv-dev
----------------------------------------------------------
Devices
=======
A maximum of 12 ivtv boards are allowed at the moment.
Cards that don't have a video output capability (i.e. non PVR350 cards)
lack the vbi8, vbi16, video16 and video48 devices. They also do not
support the framebuffer device /dev/fbx for OSD.
The radio0 device may or may not be present, depending on whether the
card has a radio tuner or not.
Here is a list of the base v4l devices:
crw-rw---- 1 root video 81, 0 Jun 19 22:22 /dev/video0
crw-rw---- 1 root video 81, 16 Jun 19 22:22 /dev/video16
crw-rw---- 1 root video 81, 24 Jun 19 22:22 /dev/video24
crw-rw---- 1 root video 81, 32 Jun 19 22:22 /dev/video32
crw-rw---- 1 root video 81, 48 Jun 19 22:22 /dev/video48
crw-rw---- 1 root video 81, 64 Jun 19 22:22 /dev/radio0
crw-rw---- 1 root video 81, 224 Jun 19 22:22 /dev/vbi0
crw-rw---- 1 root video 81, 228 Jun 19 22:22 /dev/vbi8
crw-rw---- 1 root video 81, 232 Jun 19 22:22 /dev/vbi16
Base devices
============
For every extra card you have the numbers increased by one. For example,
/dev/video0 is listed as the 'base' encoding capture device so we have:
/dev/video0 is the encoding capture device for the first card (card 0)
/dev/video1 is the encoding capture device for the second card (card 1)
/dev/video2 is the encoding capture device for the third card (card 2)
Note that if the first card doesn't have a feature (eg no decoder, so no
video16, the second card will still use video17. The simple rule is 'add
the card number to the base device number'. If you have other capture
cards (e.g. WinTV PCI) that are detected first, then you have to tell
the ivtv module about it so that it will start counting at 1 (or 2, or
whatever). Otherwise the device numbers can get confusing. The ivtv
'ivtv_first_minor' module option can be used for that.
/dev/video0
The encoding capture device(s).
Read-only.
Reading from this device gets you the MPEG1/2 program stream.
Example:
cat /dev/video0 > my.mpg (you need to hit ctrl-c to exit)
/dev/video16
The decoder output device(s)
Write-only. Only present if the MPEG decoder (i.e. CX23415) exists.
An mpeg2 stream sent to this device will appear on the selected video
display, audio will appear on the line-out/audio out. It is only
available for cards that support video out. Example:
cat my.mpg >/dev/video16
/dev/video24
The raw audio capture device(s).
Read-only
The raw audio PCM stereo stream from the currently selected
tuner or audio line-in. Reading from this device results in a raw
(signed 16 bit Little Endian, 48000 Hz, stereo pcm) capture.
This device only captures audio. This should be replaced by an ALSA
device in the future.
Note that there is no corresponding raw audio output device, this is
not supported in the decoder firmware.
/dev/video32
The raw video capture device(s)
Read-only
The raw YUV video output from the current video input. The YUV format
is non-standard (V4L2_PIX_FMT_HM12).
Note that the YUV and PCM streams are not synchronized, so they are of
limited use.
/dev/video48
The raw video display device(s)
Write-only. Only present if the MPEG decoder (i.e. CX23415) exists.
Writes a YUV stream to the decoder of the card.
/dev/radio0
The radio tuner device(s)
Cannot be read or written.
Used to enable the radio tuner and tune to a frequency. You cannot
read or write audio streams with this device. Once you use this
device to tune the radio, use /dev/video24 to read the raw pcm stream
or /dev/video0 to get an mpeg2 stream with black video.
/dev/vbi0
The 'vertical blank interval' (Teletext, CC, WSS etc) capture device(s)
Read-only
Captures the raw (or sliced) video data sent during the Vertical Blank
Interval. This data is used to encode teletext, closed captions, VPS,
widescreen signalling, electronic program guide information, and other
services.
/dev/vbi8
Processed vbi feedback device(s)
Read-only. Only present if the MPEG decoder (i.e. CX23415) exists.
The sliced VBI data embedded in an MPEG stream is reproduced on this
device. So while playing back a recording on /dev/video16, you can
read the embedded VBI data from /dev/vbi8.
/dev/vbi16
The vbi 'display' device(s)
Write-only. Only present if the MPEG decoder (i.e. CX23415) exists.
Can be used to send sliced VBI data to the video-out connector.
---------------------------------
Hans Verkuil <hverkuil@xs4all.nl>

4
Documentation/video4linux/Zoran
View File

@ -339,9 +339,9 @@ Information - video4linux/mjpeg extensions:
(also see below)
Information - video4linux2:
http://www.thedirks.org/v4l2/
http://linuxtv.org
http://v4l2spec.bytesex.org/
/usr/include/linux/videodev2.h
http://www.bytesex.org/v4l/
More information on the video4linux/mjpeg extensions, by Serguei
Miridonovi and Rainer Johanni:

2
Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Insmod-options
View File

@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ bttv.o
i2c_udelay= Allow reduce I2C speed. Default is 5 usecs
(meaning 66,67 Kbps). The default is the
maximum supported speed by kernel bitbang
algoritm. You may use lower numbers, if I2C
algorithm. You may use lower numbers, if I2C
messages are lost (16 is known to work on
all supported cards).

58
Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/fw-decoder-api.txt
View File

@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ Param[0]
0 based frame number in GOP to begin playback from.
Param[1]
Specifies the number of muted audio frames to play before normal
audio resumes.
audio resumes. (This is not implemented in the firmware, leave at 0)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@ -32,6 +32,10 @@ Description
playback stops at specified PTS.
Param[0]
Display 0=last frame, 1=black
Note: this takes effect immediately, so if you want to wait for a PTS,
then use '0', otherwise the screen goes to black at once.
You can call this later (even if there is no playback) with a 1 value
to set the screen to black.
Param[1]
PTS low
Param[2]
@ -60,8 +64,12 @@ Param[0]
31 Speed:
'0' slow
'1' fast
Note: n is limited to 2. Anything higher does not result in
faster playback. Instead the host should start dropping frames.
Param[1]
Direction: 0=forward, 1=reverse
Note: to make reverse playback work you have to write full GOPs in
reverse order.
Param[2]
Picture mask:
1=I frames
@ -69,13 +77,16 @@ Param[2]
7=I, P, B frames
Param[3]
B frames per GOP (for reverse play only)
Note: for reverse playback the Picture Mask should be set to I or I, P.
Adding B frames to the mask will result in corrupt video. This field
has to be set to the correct value in order to keep the timing correct.
Param[4]
Mute audio: 0=disable, 1=enable
Param[5]
Display 0=frame, 1=field
Param[6]
Specifies the number of muted audio frames to play before normal audio
resumes.
resumes. (Not implemented in the firmware, leave at 0)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@ -212,6 +223,7 @@ Description
Select audio mode
Param[0]
Dual mono mode action
0=Stereo, 1=Left, 2=Right, 3=Mono, 4=Swap, -1=Unchanged
Param[1]
Stereo mode action:
0=Stereo, 1=Left, 2=Right, 3=Mono, 4=Swap, -1=Unchanged
@ -224,7 +236,10 @@ Description
Setup firmware to notify the host about a particular event.
Counterpart to API 0xD5
Param[0]
Event: 0=Audio mode change between stereo and dual channel
Event: 0=Audio mode change between mono, (joint) stereo and dual channel.
Event: 3=Decoder started
Event: 4=Unknown: goes off 10-15 times per second while decoding.
Event: 5=Some sync event: goes off once per frame.
Param[1]
Notification 0=disabled, 1=enabled
Param[2]
@ -273,43 +288,6 @@ Param[3]
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_SET_AUDIO_OUTPUT
Enum 27/0x1B
Description
Select audio output format
Param[0]
Bitmask:
0:1 Data size:
'00' 16 bit
'01' 20 bit
'10' 24 bit
2:7 Unused
8:9 Mode:
'00' 2 channels
'01' 4 channels
'10' 6 channels
'11' 6 channels with one line data mode
(for left justified MSB first mode, 20 bit only)
10:11 Unused
12:13 Channel format:
'00' right justified MSB first mode
'01' left justified MSB first mode
'10' I2S mode
14:15 Unused
16:21 Right justify bit count
22:31 Unused
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_SET_AV_DELAY
Enum 28/0x1C
Description
Set audio/video delay in 90Khz ticks
Param[0]
0=A/V in sync, negative=audio lags, positive=video lags
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_DEC_SET_PREBUFFERING
Enum 30/0x1E
Description

817
Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/fw-decoder-regs.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,817 @@
PVR350 Video decoder registers 0x02002800 -> 0x02002B00
=======================================================
This list has been worked out through trial and error. There will be mistakes
and omissions. Some registers have no obvious effect so it's hard to say what
they do, while others interact with each other, or require a certain load
sequence. Horizontal filter setup is one example, with six registers working
in unison and requiring a certain load sequence to correctly configure. The
indexed colour palette is much easier to set at just two registers, but again
it requires a certain load sequence.
Some registers are fussy about what they are set to. Load in a bad value & the
decoder will fail. A firmware reload will often recover, but sometimes a reset
is required. For registers containing size information, setting them to 0 is
generally a bad idea. For other control registers i.e. 2878, you'll only find
out what values are bad when it hangs.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2800
bit 0
Decoder enable
0 = disable
1 = enable
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2804
bits 0:31
Decoder horizontal Y alias register 1
---------------
2808
bits 0:31
Decoder horizontal Y alias register 2
---------------
280C
bits 0:31
Decoder horizontal Y alias register 3
---------------
2810
bits 0:31
Decoder horizontal Y alias register 4
---------------
2814
bits 0:31
Decoder horizontal Y alias register 5
---------------
2818
bits 0:31
Decoder horizontal Y alias trigger
These six registers control the horizontal aliasing filter for the Y plane.
The first five registers must all be loaded before accessing the trigger
(2818), as this register actually clocks the data through for the first
five.
To correctly program set the filter, this whole procedure must be done 16
times. The actual register contents are copied from a lookup-table in the
firmware which contains 4 different filter settings.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
281C
bits 0:31
Decoder horizontal UV alias register 1
---------------
2820
bits 0:31
Decoder horizontal UV alias register 2
---------------
2824
bits 0:31
Decoder horizontal UV alias register 3
---------------
2828
bits 0:31
Decoder horizontal UV alias register 4
---------------
282C
bits 0:31
Decoder horizontal UV alias register 5
---------------
2830
bits 0:31
Decoder horizontal UV alias trigger
These six registers control the horizontal aliasing for the UV plane.
Operation is the same as the Y filter, with 2830 being the trigger
register.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2834
bits 0:15
Decoder Y source width in pixels
bits 16:31
Decoder Y destination width in pixels
---------------
2838
bits 0:15
Decoder UV source width in pixels
bits 16:31
Decoder UV destination width in pixels
NOTE: For both registers, the resulting image must be fully visible on
screen. If the image exceeds the right edge both the source and destination
size must be adjusted to reflect the visible portion. For the source width,
you must take into account the scaling when calculating the new value.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
283C
bits 0:31
Decoder Y horizontal scaling
Normally = Reg 2854 >> 2
---------------
2840
bits 0:31
Decoder ?? unknown - horizontal scaling
Usually 0x00080514
---------------
2844
bits 0:31
Decoder UV horizontal scaling
Normally = Reg 2854 >> 2
---------------
2848
bits 0:31
Decoder ?? unknown - horizontal scaling
Usually 0x00100514
---------------
284C
bits 0:31
Decoder ?? unknown - Y plane
Usually 0x00200020
---------------
2850
bits 0:31
Decoder ?? unknown - UV plane
Usually 0x00200020
---------------
2854
bits 0:31
Decoder 'master' value for horizontal scaling
---------------
2858
bits 0:31
Decoder ?? unknown
Usually 0
---------------
285C
bits 0:31
Decoder ?? unknown
Normally = Reg 2854 >> 1
---------------
2860
bits 0:31
Decoder ?? unknown
Usually 0
---------------
2864
bits 0:31
Decoder ?? unknown
Normally = Reg 2854 >> 1
---------------
2868
bits 0:31
Decoder ?? unknown
Usually 0
Most of these registers either control horizontal scaling, or appear linked
to it in some way. Register 2854 contains the 'master' value & the other
registers can be calculated from that one. You must also remember to
correctly set the divider in Reg 2874.
To enlarge:
Reg 2854 = (source_width * 0x00200000) / destination_width
Reg 2874 = No divide
To reduce from full size down to half size:
Reg 2854 = (source_width/2 * 0x00200000) / destination width
Reg 2874 = Divide by 2
To reduce from half size down to quarter size:
Reg 2854 = (source_width/4 * 0x00200000) / destination width
Reg 2874 = Divide by 4
The result is always rounded up.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
286C
bits 0:15
Decoder horizontal Y buffer offset
bits 15:31
Decoder horizontal UV buffer offset
Offset into the video image buffer. If the offset is gradually incremented,
the on screen image will move left & wrap around higher up on the right.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2870
bits 0:15
Decoder horizontal Y output offset
bits 16:31
Decoder horizontal UV output offset
Offsets the actual video output. Controls output alignment of the Y & UV
planes. The higher the value, the greater the shift to the left. Use
reg 2890 to move the image right.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2874
bits 0:1
Decoder horizontal Y output size divider
00 = No divide
01 = Divide by 2
10 = Divide by 3
bits 4:5
Decoder horizontal UV output size divider
00 = No divide
01 = Divide by 2
10 = Divide by 3
bit 8
Decoder ?? unknown
0 = Normal
1 = Affects video output levels
bit 16
Decoder ?? unknown
0 = Normal
1 = Disable horizontal filter
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2878
bit 0
?? unknown
bit 1
osd on/off
0 = osd off
1 = osd on
bit 2
Decoder + osd video timing
0 = NTSC
1 = PAL
bits 3:4
?? unknown
bit 5
Decoder + osd
Swaps upper & lower fields
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
287C
bits 0:10
Decoder & osd ?? unknown
Moves entire screen horizontally. Starts at 0x005 with the screen
shifted heavily to the right. Incrementing in steps of 0x004 will
gradually shift the screen to the left.
bits 11:31
?? unknown
Normally contents are 0x00101111 (NTSC) or 0x1010111d (PAL)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2880 -------- ?? unknown
2884 -------- ?? unknown
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2888
bit 0
Decoder + osd ?? unknown
0 = Normal
1 = Misaligned fields (Correctable through 289C & 28A4)
bit 4
?? unknown
bit 8
?? unknown
Warning: Bad values will require a firmware reload to recover.
Known to be bad are 0x000,0x011,0x100,0x111
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
288C
bits 0:15
osd ?? unknown
Appears to affect the osd position stability. The higher the value the
more unstable it becomes. Decoder output remains stable.
bits 16:31
osd ?? unknown
Same as bits 0:15
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2890
bits 0:11
Decoder output horizontal offset.
Horizontal offset moves the video image right. A small left shift is
possible, but it's better to use reg 2870 for that due to its greater
range.
NOTE: Video corruption will occur if video window is shifted off the right
edge. To avoid this read the notes for 2834 & 2838.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2894
bits 0:23
Decoder output video surround colour.
Contains the colour (in yuv) used to fill the screen when the video is
running in a window.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2898
bits 0:23
Decoder video window colour
Contains the colour (in yuv) used to fill the video window when the
video is turned off.
bit 24
Decoder video output
0 = Video on
1 = Video off
bit 28
Decoder plane order
0 = Y,UV
1 = UV,Y
bit 29
Decoder second plane byte order
0 = Normal (UV)
1 = Swapped (VU)
In normal usage, the first plane is Y & the second plane is UV. Though the
order of the planes can be swapped, only the byte order of the second plane
can be swapped. This isn't much use for the Y plane, but can be useful for
the UV plane.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
289C
bits 0:15
Decoder vertical field offset 1
bits 16:31
Decoder vertical field offset 2
Controls field output vertical alignment. The higher the number, the lower
the image on screen. Known starting values are 0x011E0017 (NTSC) &
0x01500017 (PAL)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
28A0
bits 0:15
Decoder & osd width in pixels
bits 16:31
Decoder & osd height in pixels
All output from the decoder & osd are disabled beyond this area. Decoder
output will simply go black outside of this region. If the osd tries to
exceed this area it will become corrupt.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
28A4
bits 0:11
osd left shift.
Has a range of 0x770->0x7FF. With the exception of 0, any value outside of
this range corrupts the osd.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
28A8
bits 0:15
osd vertical field offset 1
bits 16:31
osd vertical field offset 2
Controls field output vertical alignment. The higher the number, the lower
the image on screen. Known starting values are 0x011E0017 (NTSC) &
0x01500017 (PAL)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
28AC -------- ?? unknown
|
V
28BC -------- ?? unknown
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
28C0
bit 0
Current output field
0 = first field
1 = second field
bits 16:31
Current scanline
The scanline counts from the top line of the first field
through to the last line of the second field.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
28C4 -------- ?? unknown
|
V
28F8 -------- ?? unknown
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
28FC
bit 0
?? unknown
0 = Normal
1 = Breaks decoder & osd output
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2900
bits 0:31
Decoder vertical Y alias register 1
---------------
2904
bits 0:31
Decoder vertical Y alias register 2
---------------
2908
bits 0:31
Decoder vertical Y alias trigger
These three registers control the vertical aliasing filter for the Y plane.
Operation is similar to the horizontal Y filter (2804). The only real
difference is that there are only two registers to set before accessing
the trigger register (2908). As for the horizontal filter, the values are
taken from a lookup table in the firmware, and the procedure must be
repeated 16 times to fully program the filter.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
290C
bits 0:31
Decoder vertical UV alias register 1
---------------
2910
bits 0:31
Decoder vertical UV alias register 2
---------------
2914
bits 0:31
Decoder vertical UV alias trigger
These three registers control the vertical aliasing filter for the UV
plane. Operation is the same as the Y filter, with 2914 being the trigger.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2918
bits 0:15
Decoder Y source height in pixels
bits 16:31
Decoder Y destination height in pixels
---------------
291C
bits 0:15
Decoder UV source height in pixels divided by 2
bits 16:31
Decoder UV destination height in pixels
NOTE: For both registers, the resulting image must be fully visible on
screen. If the image exceeds the bottom edge both the source and
destination size must be adjusted to reflect the visible portion. For the
source height, you must take into account the scaling when calculating the
new value.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2920
bits 0:31
Decoder Y vertical scaling
Normally = Reg 2930 >> 2
---------------
2924
bits 0:31
Decoder Y vertical scaling
Normally = Reg 2920 + 0x514
---------------
2928
bits 0:31
Decoder UV vertical scaling
When enlarging = Reg 2930 >> 2
When reducing = Reg 2930 >> 3
---------------
292C
bits 0:31
Decoder UV vertical scaling
Normally = Reg 2928 + 0x514
---------------
2930
bits 0:31
Decoder 'master' value for vertical scaling
---------------
2934
bits 0:31
Decoder ?? unknown - Y vertical scaling
---------------
2938
bits 0:31
Decoder Y vertical scaling
Normally = Reg 2930
---------------
293C
bits 0:31
Decoder ?? unknown - Y vertical scaling
---------------
2940
bits 0:31
Decoder UV vertical scaling
When enlarging = Reg 2930 >> 1
When reducing = Reg 2930
---------------
2944
bits 0:31
Decoder ?? unknown - UV vertical scaling
---------------
2948
bits 0:31
Decoder UV vertical scaling
Normally = Reg 2940
---------------
294C
bits 0:31
Decoder ?? unknown - UV vertical scaling
Most of these registers either control vertical scaling, or appear linked
to it in some way. Register 2930 contains the 'master' value & all other
registers can be calculated from that one. You must also remember to
correctly set the divider in Reg 296C
To enlarge:
Reg 2930 = (source_height * 0x00200000) / destination_height
Reg 296C = No divide
To reduce from full size down to half size:
Reg 2930 = (source_height/2 * 0x00200000) / destination height
Reg 296C = Divide by 2
To reduce from half down to quarter.
Reg 2930 = (source_height/4 * 0x00200000) / destination height
Reg 296C = Divide by 4
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2950
bits 0:15
Decoder Y line index into display buffer, first field
bits 16:31
Decoder Y vertical line skip, first field
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2954
bits 0:15
Decoder Y line index into display buffer, second field
bits 16:31
Decoder Y vertical line skip, second field
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2958
bits 0:15
Decoder UV line index into display buffer, first field
bits 16:31
Decoder UV vertical line skip, first field
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
295C
bits 0:15
Decoder UV line index into display buffer, second field
bits 16:31
Decoder UV vertical line skip, second field
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2960
bits 0:15
Decoder destination height minus 1
bits 16:31
Decoder destination height divided by 2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2964
bits 0:15
Decoder Y vertical offset, second field
bits 16:31
Decoder Y vertical offset, first field
These two registers shift the Y plane up. The higher the number, the
greater the shift.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2968
bits 0:15
Decoder UV vertical offset, second field
bits 16:31
Decoder UV vertical offset, first field
These two registers shift the UV plane up. The higher the number, the
greater the shift.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
296C
bits 0:1
Decoder vertical Y output size divider
00 = No divide
01 = Divide by 2
10 = Divide by 4
bits 8:9
Decoder vertical UV output size divider
00 = No divide
01 = Divide by 2
10 = Divide by 4
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2970
bit 0
Decoder ?? unknown
0 = Normal
1 = Affect video output levels
bit 16
Decoder ?? unknown
0 = Normal
1 = Disable vertical filter
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2974 -------- ?? unknown
|
V
29EF -------- ?? unknown
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2A00
bits 0:2
osd colour mode
000 = 8 bit indexed
001 = 16 bit (565)
010 = 15 bit (555)
011 = 12 bit (444)
100 = 32 bit (8888)
bits 4:5
osd display bpp
01 = 8 bit
10 = 16 bit
11 = 32 bit
bit 8
osd global alpha
0 = Off
1 = On
bit 9
osd local alpha
0 = Off
1 = On
bit 10
osd colour key
0 = Off
1 = On
bit 11
osd ?? unknown
Must be 1
bit 13
osd colour space
0 = ARGB
1 = AYVU
bits 16:31
osd ?? unknown
Must be 0x001B (some kind of buffer pointer ?)
When the bits-per-pixel is set to 8, the colour mode is ignored and
assumed to be 8 bit indexed. For 16 & 32 bits-per-pixel the colour depth
is honoured, and when using a colour depth that requires fewer bytes than
allocated the extra bytes are used as padding. So for a 32 bpp with 8 bit
index colour, there are 3 padding bytes per pixel. It's also possible to
select 16bpp with a 32 bit colour mode. This results in the pixel width
being doubled, but the color key will not work as expected in this mode.
Colour key is as it suggests. You designate a colour which will become
completely transparent. When using 565, 555 or 444 colour modes, the
colour key is always 16 bits wide. The colour to key on is set in Reg 2A18.
Local alpha works differently depending on the colour mode. For 32bpp & 8
bit indexed, local alpha is a per-pixel 256 step transparency, with 0 being
transparent and 255 being solid. For the 16bpp modes 555 & 444, the unused
bit(s) act as a simple transparency switch, with 0 being solid & 1 being
fully transparent. There is no local alpha support for 16bit 565.
Global alpha is a 256 step transparency that applies to the entire osd,
with 0 being transparent & 255 being solid.
It's possible to combine colour key, local alpha & global alpha.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2A04
bits 0:15
osd x coord for left edge
bits 16:31
osd y coord for top edge
---------------
2A08
bits 0:15
osd x coord for right edge
bits 16:31
osd y coord for bottom edge
For both registers, (0,0) = top left corner of the display area. These
registers do not control the osd size, only where it's positioned & how
much is visible. The visible osd area cannot exceed the right edge of the
display, otherwise the osd will become corrupt. See reg 2A10 for
setting osd width.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2A0C
bits 0:31
osd buffer index
An index into the osd buffer. Slowly incrementing this moves the osd left,
wrapping around onto the right edge
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2A10
bits 0:11
osd buffer 32 bit word width
Contains the width of the osd measured in 32 bit words. This means that all
colour modes are restricted to a byte width which is divisible by 4.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2A14
bits 0:15
osd height in pixels
bits 16:32
osd line index into buffer
osd will start displaying from this line.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2A18
bits 0:31
osd colour key
Contains the colour value which will be transparent.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2A1C
bits 0:7
osd global alpha
Contains the global alpha value (equiv ivtvfbctl --alpha XX)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2A20 -------- ?? unknown
|
V
2A2C -------- ?? unknown
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2A30
bits 0:7
osd colour to change in indexed palette
---------------
2A34
bits 0:31
osd colour for indexed palette
To set the new palette, first load the index of the colour to change into
2A30, then load the new colour into 2A34. The full palette is 256 colours,
so the index range is 0x00-0xFF
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2A38 -------- ?? unknown
2A3C -------- ?? unknown
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2A40
bits 0:31
osd ?? unknown
Affects overall brightness, wrapping around to black
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2A44
bits 0:31
osd ?? unknown
Green tint
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2A48
bits 0:31
osd ?? unknown
Red tint
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2A4C
bits 0:31
osd ?? unknown
Affects overall brightness, wrapping around to black
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2A50
bits 0:31
osd ?? unknown
Colour shift
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2A54
bits 0:31
osd ?? unknown
Colour shift
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2A58 -------- ?? unknown
|
V
2AFC -------- ?? unknown
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2B00
bit 0
osd filter control
0 = filter off
1 = filter on
bits 1:4
osd ?? unknown
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
v0.4 - 12 March 2007 - Ian Armstrong (ian@iarmst.demon.co.uk)

16
Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/fw-dma.txt
View File

@ -22,6 +22,8 @@ urged to choose a smaller block size and learn the scatter-gather technique.
Mailbox #10 is reserved for DMA transfer information.
Note: the hardware expects little-endian data ('intel format').
Flow
====
@ -64,7 +66,7 @@ addresses are the physical memory location of the target DMA buffer.
Each S-G array element is a struct of three 32-bit words. The first word is
the source address, the second is the destination address. Both take up the
entire 32 bits. The lowest 16 bits of the third word is the transfer byte
entire 32 bits. The lowest 18 bits of the third word is the transfer byte
count. The high-bit of the third word is the "last" flag. The last-flag tells
the card to raise the DMA_DONE interrupt. From hard personal experience, if
you forget to set this bit, the card will still "work" but the stream will
@ -78,8 +80,8 @@ Array Element:
- 32-bit Source Address
- 32-bit Destination Address
- 16-bit reserved (high bit is the last flag)
- 16-bit byte count
- 14-bit reserved (high bit is the last flag)
- 18-bit byte count
DMA Transfer Status
===================
@ -87,8 +89,8 @@ DMA Transfer Status
Register 0x0004 holds the DMA Transfer Status:
Bit
4 Scatter-Gather array error
3 DMA write error
2 DMA read error
1 write completed
0 read completed
1 write completed
2 DMA read error
3 DMA write error
4 Scatter-Gather array error

71
Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/fw-encoder-api.txt
View File

@ -213,16 +213,6 @@ Param[1]
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_3_2_PULLDOWN
Enum 177/0xB1
Description
3:2 pulldown properties
Param[0]
0=enabled
1=disabled
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_VBI_LINE
Enum 183/0xB7
Description
@ -332,9 +322,7 @@ Param[0]
'01'=JointStereo
'10'=Dual
'11'=Mono
Note: testing seems to indicate that Mono and possibly
JointStereo are not working (default to stereo).
Dual does work, though.
Note: the cx23415 cannot decode Joint Stereo properly.
10:11 Mode Extension used in joint_stereo mode.
In Layer I and II they indicate which subbands are in
@ -413,16 +401,34 @@ Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_PGM_INDEX_INFO
Enum 199/0xC7
Description
Sets the Program Index Information.
The information is stored as follows:
struct info {
u32 length; // Length of this frame
u32 offset_low; // Offset in the file of the
u32 offset_high; // start of this frame
u32 mask1; // Bits 0-1 are the type mask:
// 1=I, 2=P, 4=B
u32 pts; // The PTS of the frame
u32 mask2; // Bit 0 is bit 32 of the pts.
};
u32 table_ptr;
struct info index[400];
The table_ptr is the encoder memory address in the table were
*new* entries will be written. Note that this is a ringbuffer,
so the table_ptr will wraparound.
Param[0]
Picture Mask:
0=No index capture
1=I frames
3=I,P frames
7=I,P,B frames
(Seems to be ignored, it always indexes I, P and B frames)
Param[1]
Elements requested (up to 400)
Result[0]
Offset in SDF memory of the table.
Offset in the encoder memory of the start of the table.
Result[1]
Number of allocated elements up to a maximum of Param[1]
@ -492,12 +498,14 @@ Name CX2341X_ENC_GET_PREV_DMA_INFO_MB_9
Enum 203/0xCB
Description
Returns information on the previous DMA transfer in conjunction with
bit 27 of the interrupt mask. Uses mailbox 9.
bit 27 or 18 of the interrupt mask. Uses mailbox 9.
Result[0]
Status bits:
Bit 0 set indicates transfer complete
Bit 2 set indicates transfer error
Bit 4 set indicates linked list error
0 read completed
1 write completed
2 DMA read error
3 DMA write error
4 Scatter-Gather array error
Result[1]
DMA type
Result[2]
@ -655,12 +663,13 @@ Param[0]
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name CX2341X_ENC_UNKNOWN
Name CX2341X_ENC_SET_VERT_CROP_LINE
Enum 219/0xDB
Description
Unknown API, it's used by Hauppauge though.
Something to do with 'Vertical Crop Line'
Param[0]
0 This is the value Hauppauge uses, Unknown what it means.
If saa7114 and raw VBI capture and 60 Hz, then set to 10001.
Else 0.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@ -672,21 +681,25 @@ Description
the value.
Param[0]
Command number:
1=set initial SCR value when starting encoding.
1=set initial SCR value when starting encoding (works).
2=set quality mode (apparently some test setting).
3=setup advanced VIM protection handling (supposedly only for the cx23416
for raw YUV).
Actually it looks like this should be 0 for saa7114/5 based card and 1
for cx25840 based cards.
4=generate artificial PTS timestamps
3=setup advanced VIM protection handling.
Always 1 for the cx23416 and 0 for cx23415.
4=generate DVD compatible PTS timestamps
5=USB flush mode
6=something to do with the quantization matrix
7=set navigation pack insertion for DVD
7=set navigation pack insertion for DVD: adds 0xbf (private stream 2)
packets to the MPEG. The size of these packets is 2048 bytes (including
the header of 6 bytes: 0x000001bf + length). The payload is zeroed and
it is up to the application to fill them in. These packets are apparently
inserted every four frames.
8=enable scene change detection (seems to be a failure)
9=set history parameters of the video input module
10=set input field order of VIM
11=set quantization matrix
12=reset audio interface
12=reset audio interface after channel change or input switch (has no argument).
Needed for the cx2584x, not needed for the mspx4xx, but it doesn't seem to
do any harm calling it regardless.
13=set audio volume delay
14=set audio delay

10
Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/fw-memory.txt
View File

@ -1,6 +1,8 @@
This document describes the cx2341x memory map and documents some of the register
space.
Note: the memory long words are little-endian ('intel format').
Warning! This information was figured out from searching through the memory and
registers, this information may not be correct and is certainly not complete, and
was not derived from anything more than searching through the memory space with
@ -67,7 +69,7 @@ DMA Registers 0x000-0xff:
0x84 - first write linked list reg, for pci memory addr
0x88 - first write linked list reg, for length of buffer in memory addr
(|0x80000000 or this for last link)
0x8c-0xcc - rest of write linked list reg, 8 sets of 3 total, DMA goes here
0x8c-0xdc - rest of write linked list reg, 8 sets of 3 total, DMA goes here
from linked list addr in reg 0x0c, firmware must push through or
something.
0xe0 - first (and only) read linked list reg, for pci memory addr
@ -123,12 +125,8 @@ Bit
29 Encoder VBI capture
28 Encoder Video Input Module reset event
27 Encoder DMA complete
26
25 Decoder copy protect detection event
24 Decoder audio mode change detection event
23
24 Decoder audio mode change detection event (through event notification)
22 Decoder data request
21 Decoder I-Frame? done
20 Decoder DMA complete
19 Decoder VBI re-insertion
18 Decoder DMA err (linked-list bad)

12
Documentation/video4linux/cx2341x/fw-osd-api.txt
View File

@ -21,7 +21,11 @@ Enum 66/0x42
Description
Query OSD format
Result[0]
0=8bit index, 4=AlphaRGB 8:8:8:8
0=8bit index
1=16bit RGB 5:6:5
2=16bit ARGB 1:5:5:5
3=16bit ARGB 1:4:4:4
4=32bit ARGB 8:8:8:8
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@ -30,7 +34,11 @@ Enum 67/0x43
Description
Assign pixel format
Param[0]
0=8bit index, 4=AlphaRGB 8:8:8:8
0=8bit index
1=16bit RGB 5:6:5
2=16bit ARGB 1:5:5:5
3=16bit ARGB 1:4:4:4
4=32bit ARGB 8:8:8:8
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

7
Documentation/video4linux/et61x251.txt
View File

@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ Index
1. Copyright
============
Copyright (C) 2006 by Luca Risolia <luca.risolia@studio.unibo.it>
Copyright (C) 2006-2007 by Luca Risolia <luca.risolia@studio.unibo.it>
2. Disclaimer
@ -135,8 +135,9 @@ And finally:
6. Module loading
=================
To use the driver, it is necessary to load the "et61x251" module into memory
after every other module required: "videodev", "usbcore" and, depending on
the USB host controller you have, "ehci-hcd", "uhci-hcd" or "ohci-hcd".
after every other module required: "videodev", "v4l2_common", "compat_ioctl32",
"usbcore" and, depending on the USB host controller you have, "ehci-hcd",
"uhci-hcd" or "ohci-hcd".
Loading can be done as shown below:

7
Documentation/video4linux/meye.txt
View File

@ -5,10 +5,9 @@ Vaio Picturebook Motion Eye Camera Driver Readme
Copyright (C) 2000 Andrew Tridgell <tridge@samba.org>
This driver enable the use of video4linux compatible applications with the
Motion Eye camera. This driver requires the "Sony Vaio Programmable I/O
Control Device" driver (which can be found in the "Character drivers"
section of the kernel configuration utility) to be compiled and installed
(using its "camera=1" parameter).
Motion Eye camera. This driver requires the "Sony Laptop Extras" driver (which
can be found in the "Misc devices" section of the kernel configuration utility)
to be compiled and installed (using its "camera=1" parameter).
It can do at maximum 30 fps @ 320x240 or 15 fps @ 640x480.

282
Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt
View File

@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
SN9C10x PC Camera Controllers
SN9C1xx PC Camera Controllers
Driver for Linux
=============================
@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ Index
1. Copyright
============
Copyright (C) 2004-2006 by Luca Risolia <luca.risolia@studio.unibo.it>
Copyright (C) 2004-2007 by Luca Risolia <luca.risolia@studio.unibo.it>
2. Disclaimer
@ -53,20 +53,14 @@ Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
4. Overview and features
========================
This driver attempts to support the video interface of the devices mounting the
SONiX SN9C101, SN9C102 and SN9C103 PC Camera Controllers.
It's worth to note that SONiX has never collaborated with the author during the
development of this project, despite several requests for enough detailed
specifications of the register tables, compression engine and video data format
of the above chips. Nevertheless, these informations are no longer necessary,
because all the aspects related to these chips are known and have been
described in detail in this documentation.
This driver attempts to support the video interface of the devices assembling
the SONiX SN9C101, SN9C102, SN9C103, SN9C105 and SN9C120 PC Camera Controllers
("SN9C1xx" from now on).
The driver relies on the Video4Linux2 and USB core modules. It has been
designed to run properly on SMP systems as well.
The latest version of the SN9C10x driver can be found at the following URL:
The latest version of the SN9C1xx driver can be found at the following URL:
http://www.linux-projects.org/
Some of the features of the driver are:
@ -85,11 +79,11 @@ Some of the features of the driver are:
high compression quality (see also "Notes for V4L2 application developers"
and "Video frame formats" paragraphs);
- full support for the capabilities of many of the possible image sensors that
can be connected to the SN9C10x bridges, including, for instance, red, green,
can be connected to the SN9C1xx bridges, including, for instance, red, green,
blue and global gain adjustments and exposure (see "Supported devices"
paragraph for details);
- use of default color settings for sunlight conditions;
- dynamic I/O interface for both SN9C10x and image sensor control and
- dynamic I/O interface for both SN9C1xx and image sensor control and
monitoring (see "Optional device control through 'sysfs'" paragraph);
- dynamic driver control thanks to various module parameters (see "Module
parameters" paragraph);
@ -130,8 +124,8 @@ necessary:
CONFIG_USB_UHCI_HCD=m
CONFIG_USB_OHCI_HCD=m
The SN9C103 controller also provides a built-in microphone interface. It is
supported by the USB Audio driver thanks to the ALSA API:
The SN9C103, SN9c105 and SN9C120 controllers also provide a built-in microphone
interface. It is supported by the USB Audio driver thanks to the ALSA API:
# Sound
#
@ -155,18 +149,27 @@ And finally:
6. Module loading
=================
To use the driver, it is necessary to load the "sn9c102" module into memory
after every other module required: "videodev", "usbcore" and, depending on
the USB host controller you have, "ehci-hcd", "uhci-hcd" or "ohci-hcd".
after every other module required: "videodev", "v4l2_common", "compat_ioctl32",
"usbcore" and, depending on the USB host controller you have, "ehci-hcd",
"uhci-hcd" or "ohci-hcd".
Loading can be done as shown below:
[root@localhost home]# modprobe sn9c102
At this point the devices should be recognized. You can invoke "dmesg" to
analyze kernel messages and verify that the loading process has gone well:
Note that the module is called "sn9c102" for historic reasons, althought it
does not just support the SN9C102.
At this point all the devices supported by the driver and connected to the USB
ports should be recognized. You can invoke "dmesg" to analyze kernel messages
and verify that the loading process has gone well:
[user@localhost home]$ dmesg
or, to isolate all the kernel messages generated by the driver:
[user@localhost home]$ dmesg | grep sn9c102
7. Module parameters
====================
@ -198,10 +201,11 @@ Default: 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name: frame_timeout
Type: uint array (min = 0, max = 64)
Syntax: <n[,...]>
Description: Timeout for a video frame in seconds. This parameter is
specific for each detected camera. This parameter can be
changed at runtime thanks to the /sys filesystem interface.
Syntax: <0|n[,...]>
Description: Timeout for a video frame in seconds before returning an I/O
error; 0 for infinity. This parameter is specific for each
detected camera and can be changed at runtime thanks to the
/sys filesystem interface.
Default: 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name: debug
@ -212,10 +216,10 @@ Description: Debugging information level, from 0 to 3:
1 = critical errors
2 = significant informations
3 = more verbose messages
Level 3 is useful for testing only, when only one device
is used. It also shows some more informations about the
hardware being detected. This parameter can be changed at
runtime thanks to the /sys filesystem interface.
Level 3 is useful for testing only. It also shows some more
informations about the hardware being detected.
This parameter can be changed at runtime thanks to the /sys
filesystem interface.
Default: 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
@ -223,20 +227,21 @@ Default: 2
8. Optional device control through "sysfs" [1]
==========================================
If the kernel has been compiled with the CONFIG_VIDEO_ADV_DEBUG option enabled,
it is possible to read and write both the SN9C10x and the image sensor
it is possible to read and write both the SN9C1xx and the image sensor
registers by using the "sysfs" filesystem interface.
Every time a supported device is recognized, a write-only file named "green" is
created in the /sys/class/video4linux/videoX directory. You can set the green
channel's gain by writing the desired value to it. The value may range from 0
to 15 for SN9C101 or SN9C102 bridges, from 0 to 127 for SN9C103 bridges.
Similarly, only for SN9C103 controllers, blue and red gain control files are
available in the same directory, for which accepted values may range from 0 to
127.
to 15 for the SN9C101 or SN9C102 bridges, from 0 to 127 for the SN9C103,
SN9C105 and SN9C120 bridges.
Similarly, only for the SN9C103, SN9C105 and SN9C120 controllers, blue and red
gain control files are available in the same directory, for which accepted
values may range from 0 to 127.
There are other four entries in the directory above for each registered camera:
"reg", "val", "i2c_reg" and "i2c_val". The first two files control the
SN9C10x bridge, while the other two control the sensor chip. "reg" and
SN9C1xx bridge, while the other two control the sensor chip. "reg" and
"i2c_reg" hold the values of the current register index where the following
reading/writing operations are addressed at through "val" and "i2c_val". Their
use is not intended for end-users. Note that "i2c_reg" and "i2c_val" will not
@ -259,61 +264,84 @@ Now let's set the green gain's register of the SN9C101 or SN9C102 chips to 2:
[root@localhost #] echo 0x11 > reg
[root@localhost #] echo 2 > val
Note that the SN9C10x always returns 0 when some of its registers are read.
Note that the SN9C1xx always returns 0 when some of its registers are read.
To avoid race conditions, all the I/O accesses to the above files are
serialized.
The sysfs interface also provides the "frame_header" entry, which exports the
frame header of the most recent requested and captured video frame. The header
is always 18-bytes long and is appended to every video frame by the SN9C10x
is always 18-bytes long and is appended to every video frame by the SN9C1xx
controllers. As an example, this additional information can be used by the user
application for implementing auto-exposure features via software.
The following table describes the frame header:
The following table describes the frame header exported by the SN9C101 and
SN9C102:
Byte # Value Description
------ ----- -----------
0x00 0xFF Frame synchronisation pattern.
0x01 0xFF Frame synchronisation pattern.
0x02 0x00 Frame synchronisation pattern.
0x03 0xC4 Frame synchronisation pattern.
0x04 0xC4 Frame synchronisation pattern.
0x05 0x96 Frame synchronisation pattern.
0x06 0xXX Unknown meaning. The exact value depends on the chip;
possible values are 0x00, 0x01 and 0x20.
0x07 0xXX Variable value, whose bits are ff00uzzc, where ff is a
frame counter, u is unknown, zz is a size indicator
(00 = VGA, 01 = SIF, 10 = QSIF) and c stands for
"compression enabled" (1 = yes, 0 = no).
0x08 0xXX Brightness sum inside Auto-Exposure area (low-byte).
0x09 0xXX Brightness sum inside Auto-Exposure area (high-byte).
For a pure white image, this number will be equal to 500
times the area of the specified AE area. For images
that are not pure white, the value scales down according
to relative whiteness.
0x0A 0xXX Brightness sum outside Auto-Exposure area (low-byte).
0x0B 0xXX Brightness sum outside Auto-Exposure area (high-byte).
For a pure white image, this number will be equal to 125
times the area outside of the specified AE area. For
images that are not pure white, the value scales down
according to relative whiteness.
according to relative whiteness.
Byte # Value or bits Description
------ ------------- -----------
0x00 0xFF Frame synchronisation pattern
0x01 0xFF Frame synchronisation pattern
0x02 0x00 Frame synchronisation pattern
0x03 0xC4 Frame synchronisation pattern
0x04 0xC4 Frame synchronisation pattern
0x05 0x96 Frame synchronisation pattern
0x06 [3:0] Read channel gain control = (1+R_GAIN/8)
[7:4] Blue channel gain control = (1+B_GAIN/8)
0x07 [ 0 ] Compression mode. 0=No compression, 1=Compression enabled
[2:1] Maximum scale factor for compression
[ 3 ] 1 = USB fifo(2K bytes) is full
[ 4 ] 1 = Digital gain is finish
[ 5 ] 1 = Exposure is finish
[7:6] Frame index
0x08 [7:0] Y sum inside Auto-Exposure area (low-byte)
0x09 [7:0] Y sum inside Auto-Exposure area (high-byte)
where Y sum = (R/4 + 5G/16 + B/8) / 32
0x0A [7:0] Y sum outside Auto-Exposure area (low-byte)
0x0B [7:0] Y sum outside Auto-Exposure area (high-byte)
where Y sum = (R/4 + 5G/16 + B/8) / 128
0x0C 0xXX Not used
0x0D 0xXX Not used
0x0E 0xXX Not used
0x0F 0xXX Not used
0x10 0xXX Not used
0x11 0xXX Not used
The following bytes are used by the SN9C103 bridge only:
The following table describes the frame header exported by the SN9C103:
0x0C 0xXX Unknown meaning
0x0D 0xXX Unknown meaning
0x0E 0xXX Unknown meaning
0x0F 0xXX Unknown meaning
0x10 0xXX Unknown meaning
0x11 0xXX Unknown meaning
Byte # Value or bits Description
------ ------------- -----------
0x00 0xFF Frame synchronisation pattern
0x01 0xFF Frame synchronisation pattern
0x02 0x00 Frame synchronisation pattern
0x03 0xC4 Frame synchronisation pattern
0x04 0xC4 Frame synchronisation pattern
0x05 0x96 Frame synchronisation pattern
0x06 [6:0] Read channel gain control = (1/2+R_GAIN/64)
0x07 [6:0] Blue channel gain control = (1/2+B_GAIN/64)
[7:4]
0x08 [ 0 ] Compression mode. 0=No compression, 1=Compression enabled
[2:1] Maximum scale factor for compression
[ 3 ] 1 = USB fifo(2K bytes) is full
[ 4 ] 1 = Digital gain is finish
[ 5 ] 1 = Exposure is finish
[7:6] Frame index
0x09 [7:0] Y sum inside Auto-Exposure area (low-byte)
0x0A [7:0] Y sum inside Auto-Exposure area (high-byte)
where Y sum = (R/4 + 5G/16 + B/8) / 32
0x0B [7:0] Y sum outside Auto-Exposure area (low-byte)
0x0C [7:0] Y sum outside Auto-Exposure area (high-byte)
where Y sum = (R/4 + 5G/16 + B/8) / 128
0x0D [1:0] Audio frame number
[ 2 ] 1 = Audio is recording
0x0E [7:0] Audio summation (low-byte)
0x0F [7:0] Audio summation (high-byte)
0x10 [7:0] Audio sample count
0x11 [7:0] Audio peak data in audio frame
The AE area (sx, sy, ex, ey) in the active window can be set by programming the
registers 0x1c, 0x1d, 0x1e and 0x1f of the SN9C10x controllers, where one unit
registers 0x1c, 0x1d, 0x1e and 0x1f of the SN9C1xx controllers, where one unit
corresponds to 32 pixels.
[1] Part of the meaning of the frame header has been documented by Bertrik
Sikken.
[1] The frame headers exported by the SN9C105 and SN9C120 are not described.
9. Supported devices
@ -323,15 +351,19 @@ here. They have never collaborated with the author, so no advertising.
From the point of view of a driver, what unambiguously identify a device are
its vendor and product USB identifiers. Below is a list of known identifiers of
devices mounting the SN9C10x PC camera controllers:
devices assembling the SN9C1xx PC camera controllers:
Vendor ID Product ID
--------- ----------
0x0471 0x0327
0x0471 0x0328
0x0c45 0x6001
0x0c45 0x6005
0x0c45 0x6007
0x0c45 0x6009
0x0c45 0x600d
0x0c45 0x6011
0x0c45 0x6019
0x0c45 0x6024
0x0c45 0x6025
0x0c45 0x6028
@ -342,6 +374,7 @@ Vendor ID Product ID
0x0c45 0x602d
0x0c45 0x602e
0x0c45 0x6030
0x0c45 0x603f
0x0c45 0x6080
0x0c45 0x6082
0x0c45 0x6083
@ -368,24 +401,51 @@ Vendor ID Product ID
0x0c45 0x60bb
0x0c45 0x60bc
0x0c45 0x60be
0x0c45 0x60c0
0x0c45 0x60c2
0x0c45 0x60c8
0x0c45 0x60cc
0x0c45 0x60ea
0x0c45 0x60ec
0x0c45 0x60ef
0x0c45 0x60fa
0x0c45 0x60fb
0x0c45 0x60fc
0x0c45 0x60fe
0x0c45 0x6102
0x0c45 0x6108
0x0c45 0x610f
0x0c45 0x6130
0x0c45 0x6138
0x0c45 0x613a
0x0c45 0x613b
0x0c45 0x613c
0x0c45 0x613e
The list above does not imply that all those devices work with this driver: up
until now only the ones that mount the following image sensors are supported;
kernel messages will always tell you whether this is the case:
until now only the ones that assemble the following pairs of SN9C1xx bridges
and image sensors are supported; kernel messages will always tell you whether
this is the case (see "Module loading" paragraph):
Model Manufacturer
----- ------------
HV7131D Hynix Semiconductor, Inc.
MI-0343 Micron Technology, Inc.
OV7630 OmniVision Technologies, Inc.
PAS106B PixArt Imaging, Inc.
PAS202BCA PixArt Imaging, Inc.
PAS202BCB PixArt Imaging, Inc.
TAS5110C1B Taiwan Advanced Sensor Corporation
TAS5130D1B Taiwan Advanced Sensor Corporation
Image sensor / SN9C1xx bridge | SN9C10[12] SN9C103 SN9C105 SN9C120
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
HV7131D Hynix Semiconductor | Yes No No No
HV7131R Hynix Semiconductor | No Yes Yes Yes
MI-0343 Micron Technology | Yes No No No
MI-0360 Micron Technology | No Yes No No
OV7630 OmniVision Technologies | Yes Yes No No
OV7660 OmniVision Technologies | No No Yes Yes
PAS106B PixArt Imaging | Yes No No No
PAS202B PixArt Imaging | Yes Yes No No
TAS5110C1B Taiwan Advanced Sensor | Yes No No No
TAS5110D Taiwan Advanced Sensor | Yes No No No
TAS5130D1B Taiwan Advanced Sensor | Yes No No No
All the available control settings of each image sensor are supported through
the V4L2 interface.
"Yes" means that the pair is supported by the driver, while "No" means that the
pair does not exist or is not supported by the driver.
Only some of the available control settings of each image sensor are supported
through the V4L2 interface.
Donations of new models for further testing and support would be much
appreciated. Non-available hardware will not be supported by the author of this
@ -429,12 +489,15 @@ supplied by this driver).
11. Video frame formats [1]
=======================
The SN9C10x PC Camera Controllers can send images in two possible video
formats over the USB: either native "Sequential RGB Bayer" or Huffman
compressed. The latter is used to achieve high frame rates. The current video
format may be selected or queried from the user application by calling the
VIDIOC_S_FMT or VIDIOC_G_FMT ioctl's, as described in the V4L2 API
specifications.
The SN9C1xx PC Camera Controllers can send images in two possible video
formats over the USB: either native "Sequential RGB Bayer" or compressed.
The compression is used to achieve high frame rates. With regard to the
SN9C101, SN9C102 and SN9C103, the compression is based on the Huffman encoding
algorithm described below, while with regard to the SN9C105 and SN9C120 the
compression is based on the JPEG standard.
The current video format may be selected or queried from the user application
by calling the VIDIOC_S_FMT or VIDIOC_G_FMT ioctl's, as described in the V4L2
API specifications.
The name "Sequential Bayer" indicates the organization of the red, green and
blue pixels in one video frame. Each pixel is associated with a 8-bit long
@ -447,14 +510,14 @@ G[m] R[m+1] G[m+2] R[m+2] ... G[2m-2] R[2m-1]
... G[n(m-2)] R[n(m-1)]
The above matrix also represents the sequential or progressive read-out mode of
the (n, m) Bayer color filter array used in many CCD/CMOS image sensors.
the (n, m) Bayer color filter array used in many CCD or CMOS image sensors.
One compressed video frame consists of a bitstream that encodes for every R, G,
or B pixel the difference between the value of the pixel itself and some
reference pixel value. Pixels are organised in the Bayer pattern and the Bayer
sub-pixels are tracked individually and alternatingly. For example, in the
first line values for the B and G1 pixels are alternatingly encoded, while in
the second line values for the G2 and R pixels are alternatingly encoded.
The Huffman compressed video frame consists of a bitstream that encodes for
every R, G, or B pixel the difference between the value of the pixel itself and
some reference pixel value. Pixels are organised in the Bayer pattern and the
Bayer sub-pixels are tracked individually and alternatingly. For example, in
the first line values for the B and G1 pixels are alternatingly encoded, while
in the second line values for the G2 and R pixels are alternatingly encoded.
The pixel reference value is calculated as follows:
- the 4 top left pixels are encoded in raw uncompressed 8-bit format;
@ -470,8 +533,9 @@ The pixel reference value is calculated as follows:
decoding.
The algorithm purely describes the conversion from compressed Bayer code used
in the SN9C10x chips to uncompressed Bayer. Additional steps are required to
convert this to a color image (i.e. a color interpolation algorithm).
in the SN9C101, SN9C102 and SN9C103 chips to uncompressed Bayer. Additional
steps are required to convert this to a color image (i.e. a color interpolation
algorithm).
The following Huffman codes have been found:
0: +0 (relative to reference pixel value)
@ -506,13 +570,19 @@ order):
- Philippe Coval for having helped testing the PAS202BCA image sensor;
- Joao Rodrigo Fuzaro, Joao Limirio, Claudio Filho and Caio Begotti for the
donation of a webcam;
- Dennis Heitmann for the donation of a webcam;
- Jon Hollstrom for the donation of a webcam;
- Nick McGill for the donation of a webcam;
- Carlos Eduardo Medaglia Dyonisio, who added the support for the PAS202BCB
image sensor;
- Stefano Mozzi, who donated 45 EU;
- Andrew Pearce for the donation of a webcam;
- John Pullan for the donation of a webcam;
- Bertrik Sikken, who reverse-engineered and documented the Huffman compression
algorithm used in the SN9C10x controllers and implemented the first decoder;
algorithm used in the SN9C101, SN9C102 and SN9C103 controllers and
implemented the first decoder;
- Mizuno Takafumi for the donation of a webcam;
- an "anonymous" donator (who didn't want his name to be revealed) for the
donation of a webcam.
- an anonymous donator for the donation of four webcams and two boards with ten
image sensors.

10
Documentation/video4linux/zc0301.txt
View File

@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ Index
1. Copyright
============
Copyright (C) 2006 by Luca Risolia <luca.risolia@studio.unibo.it>
Copyright (C) 2006-2007 by Luca Risolia <luca.risolia@studio.unibo.it>
2. Disclaimer
@ -125,8 +125,9 @@ And finally:
6. Module loading
=================
To use the driver, it is necessary to load the "zc0301" module into memory
after every other module required: "videodev", "usbcore" and, depending on
the USB host controller you have, "ehci-hcd", "uhci-hcd" or "ohci-hcd".
after every other module required: "videodev", "v4l2_common", "compat_ioctl32",
"usbcore" and, depending on the USB host controller you have, "ehci-hcd",
"uhci-hcd" or "ohci-hcd".
Loading can be done as shown below:
@ -211,12 +212,11 @@ Vendor ID Product ID
0x041e 0x4036
0x041e 0x403a
0x0458 0x7007
0x0458 0x700C
0x0458 0x700c
0x0458 0x700f
0x046d 0x08ae
0x055f 0xd003
0x055f 0xd004
0x046d 0x08ae
0x0ac8 0x0301
0x0ac8 0x301b
0x0ac8 0x303b

65
Documentation/video4linux/zr364xx.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
Zoran 364xx based USB webcam module version 0.72
site: http://royale.zerezo.com/zr364xx/
mail: royale@zerezo.com
introduction:
This brings support under Linux for the Aiptek PocketDV 3300 in webcam mode.
If you just want to get on your PC the pictures and movies on the camera, you should use the usb-storage module instead.
The driver works with several other cameras in webcam mode (see the list below).
Maybe this code can work for other JPEG/USB cams based on the Coach chips from Zoran?
Possible chipsets are : ZR36430 (ZR36430BGC) and maybe ZR36431, ZR36440, ZR36442...
You can try the experience changing the vendor/product ID values (look at the source code).
You can get these values by looking at /var/log/messages when you plug your camera, or by typing : cat /proc/bus/usb/devices.
If you manage to use your cam with this code, you can send me a mail (royale@zerezo.com) with the name of your cam and a patch if needed.
This is a beta release of the driver.
Since version 0.70, this driver is only compatible with V4L2 API and 2.6.x kernels.
If you need V4L1 or 2.4x kernels support, please use an older version, but the code is not maintained anymore.
Good luck!
install:
In order to use this driver, you must compile it with your kernel.
Location: Device Drivers -> Multimedia devices -> Video For Linux -> Video Capture Adapters -> V4L USB devices
usage:
modprobe zr364xx debug=X mode=Y
- debug : set to 1 to enable verbose debug messages
- mode : 0 = 320x240, 1 = 160x120, 2 = 640x480
You can then use the camera with V4L2 compatible applications, for example Ekiga.
To capture a single image, try this: dd if=/dev/video0 of=test.jpg bs=1 count=1
links :
http://mxhaard.free.fr/ (support for many others cams including some Aiptek PocketDV)
http://www.harmwal.nl/pccam880/ (this project also supports cameras based on this chipset)
supported devices:
------ ------- ----------- -----
Vendor Product Distributor Model
------ ------- ----------- -----
0x08ca 0x0109 Aiptek PocketDV 3300
0x08ca 0x0109 Maxell Maxcam PRO DV3
0x041e 0x4024 Creative PC-CAM 880
0x0d64 0x0108 Aiptek Fidelity 3200
0x0d64 0x0108 Praktica DCZ 1.3 S
0x0d64 0x0108 Genius Digital Camera (?)
0x0d64 0x0108 DXG Technology Fashion Cam
0x0546 0x3187 Polaroid iON 230
0x0d64 0x3108 Praktica Exakta DC 2200
0x0d64 0x3108 Genius G-Shot D211
0x0595 0x4343 Concord Eye-Q Duo 1300
0x0595 0x4343 Concord Eye-Q Duo 2000
0x0595 0x4343 Fujifilm EX-10
0x0595 0x4343 Ricoh RDC-6000
0x0595 0x4343 Digitrex DSC 1300
0x0595 0x4343 Firstline FDC 2000
0x0bb0 0x500d Concord EyeQ Go Wireless
0x0feb 0x2004 CRS Electronic 3.3 Digital Camera
0x0feb 0x2004 Packard Bell DSC-300
0x055f 0xb500 Mustek MDC 3000
0x08ca 0x2062 Aiptek PocketDV 5700
0x052b 0x1a18 Chiphead Megapix V12
0x04c8 0x0729 Konica Revio 2
0x04f2 0xa208 Creative PC-CAM 850
0x0784 0x0040 Traveler Slimline X5
0x06d6 0x0034 Trust Powerc@m 750
0x0a17 0x0062 Pentax Optio 50L

4
Documentation/x86_64/boot-options.txt
View File

@ -293,7 +293,3 @@ Debugging
stuck (default)
Miscellaneous
noreplacement Don't replace instructions with more appropriate ones
for the CPU. This may be useful on asymmetric MP systems
where some CPUs have less capabilities than others.

278
MAINTAINERS
View File

@ -198,10 +198,25 @@ L: linux-sound@vger.kernel.org
W: http://www.stud.uni-karlsruhe.de/~uh1b/
S: Maintained
IPS SCSI RAID DRIVER
P: Adaptec OEM Raid Solutions
M: aacraid@adaptec.com
L: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org
W: http://www.adaptec.com/
S: Maintained
DPT_I2O SCSI RAID DRIVER
P: Adaptec OEM Raid Solutions
M: aacraid@adaptec.com
L: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org
W: http://www.adaptec.com/
S: Maintained
AACRAID SCSI RAID DRIVER
P: Adaptec OEM Raid Solutions
M: aacraid@adaptec.com
L: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org
W: http://linux.dell.com/storage.shtml
W: http://www.adaptec.com/
S: Supported
ACPI
@ -247,6 +262,13 @@ L: linux-acpi@vger.kernel.org
W: http://acpi.sourceforge.net/
S: Supported
ACPI VIDEO DRIVER
P: Luming Yu
M: luming.yu@intel.com
L: linux-acpi@vger.kernel.org
W: http://acpi.sourceforge.net/
S: Supported
AD1816 SOUND DRIVER
P: Thorsten Knabe
M: Thorsten Knabe <linux@thorsten-knabe.de>
@ -268,6 +290,12 @@ M: khali@linux-fr.org
L: lm-sensors@lm-sensors.org
S: Maintained
ADM1029 HARDWARE MONITOR DRIVER
P: Corentin Labbe
M: corentin.labbe@geomatys.fr
L: lm-sensors@lm-sensors.org
S: Maintained
ADT746X FAN DRIVER
P: Colin Leroy
M: colin@colino.net
@ -356,7 +384,7 @@ S: Supported
APPLETALK NETWORK LAYER
P: Arnaldo Carvalho de Melo
M: acme@conectiva.com.br
M: acme@ghostprotocols.net
S: Maintained
ARC FRAMEBUFFER DRIVER
@ -628,6 +656,7 @@ S: Supported
ATMEL WIRELESS DRIVER
P: Simon Kelley
M: simon@thekelleys.org.uk
L: linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
W: http://www.thekelleys.org.uk/atmel
W: http://atmelwlandriver.sourceforge.net/
S: Maintained
@ -666,6 +695,11 @@ L: linux-hams@vger.kernel.org
W: http://www.linux-ax25.org/
S: Maintained
BACKLIGHT CLASS/SUBSYSTEM
P: Richard Purdie
M: rpurdie@rpsys.net
S: Maintained
BAYCOM/HDLCDRV DRIVERS FOR AX.25
P: Thomas Sailer
M: t.sailer@alumni.ethz.ch
@ -678,6 +712,7 @@ P: Larry Finger
M: Larry.Finger@lwfinger.net
P: Stefano Brivio
M: st3@riseup.net
L: linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
W: http://bcm43xx.berlios.de/
S: Maintained
@ -838,6 +873,12 @@ W: http://linuxtv.org
T: git kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/mchehab/v4l-dvb.git
S: Maintained
CAFE CMOS INTEGRATED CAMERA CONTROLLER DRIVER
P: Jonathan Corbet
M: corbet@lwn.net
L: video4linux-list@redhat.com
S: Maintained
CALGARY x86-64 IOMMU
P: Muli Ben-Yehuda
M: muli@il.ibm.com
@ -859,6 +900,12 @@ M: maxextreme@gmail.com
L: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
S: Maintained
CFG80211 and NL80211
P: Johannes Berg
M: johannes@sipsolutions.net
L: linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
S: Maintained
COMMON INTERNET FILE SYSTEM (CIFS)
P: Steve French
M: sfrench@samba.org
@ -934,6 +981,11 @@ M: mhw@wittsend.com
W: http://www.wittsend.com/computone.html
S: Maintained
CONEXANT ACCESSRUNNER USB DRIVER
P: Simon Arlott
M: cxacru@fire.lp0.eu
S: Maintained
COSA/SRP SYNC SERIAL DRIVER
P: Jan "Yenya" Kasprzak
M: kas@fi.muni.cz
@ -1001,9 +1053,8 @@ S: Maintained
CYCLADES 2X SYNC CARD DRIVER
P: Arnaldo Carvalho de Melo
M: acme@conectiva.com.br
W: http://advogato.org/person/acme
L: cycsyn-devel@bazar.conectiva.com.br
M: acme@ghostprotocols.net
W: http://oops.ghostprotocols.net:81/blog
S: Maintained
CYCLADES ASYNC MUX DRIVER
@ -1044,7 +1095,7 @@ S: Maintained
DCCP PROTOCOL
P: Arnaldo Carvalho de Melo
M: acme@mandriva.com
M: acme@ghostprotocols.net
L: dccp@vger.kernel.org
W: http://linux-net.osdl.org/index.php/DCCP
S: Maintained
@ -1085,9 +1136,6 @@ W: http://lanana.org/docs/device-list/index.html
L: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
S: Maintained
DEVICE FILESYSTEM
S: Obsolete
DIGI INTL. EPCA DRIVER
P: Digi International, Inc
M: Eng.Linux@digi.com
@ -1288,7 +1336,7 @@ S: Maintained
ETHERNET BRIDGE
P: Stephen Hemminger
M: shemminger@linux-foundation.org
L: bridge@osdl.org
L: bridge@lists.linux-foundation.org
W: http://bridge.sourceforge.net/
S: Maintained
@ -1303,13 +1351,13 @@ S: Maintained
EXT3 FILE SYSTEM
P: Stephen Tweedie, Andrew Morton
M: sct@redhat.com, akpm@osdl.org, adilger@clusterfs.com
M: sct@redhat.com, akpm@linux-foundation.org, adilger@clusterfs.com
L: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org
S: Maintained
EXT4 FILE SYSTEM
P: Stephen Tweedie, Andrew Morton
M: sct@redhat.com, akpm@osdl.org, adilger@clusterfs.com
M: sct@redhat.com, akpm@linux-foundation.org, adilger@clusterfs.com
L: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org
S: Maintained
@ -1325,9 +1373,14 @@ M: kevin.curtis@farsite.co.uk
W: http://www.farsite.co.uk/
S: Supported
FAULT INJECTION SUPPORT
P: Akinobu Mita
M: akinobu.mita@gmail.com
S: Supported
FRAMEBUFFER LAYER
P: Antonino Daplas
M: adaplas@pol.net
M: adaplas@gmail.com
L: linux-fbdev-devel@lists.sourceforge.net (subscribers-only)
W: http://linux-fbdev.sourceforge.net/
S: Maintained
@ -1341,6 +1394,13 @@ L: linuxppc-embedded@ozlabs.org
L: netdev@vger.kernel.org
S: Maintained
FREESCALE HIGHSPEED USB DEVICE DRIVER
P: Li Yang
M: leoli@freescale.com
L: linux-usb-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
L: linuxppc-embedded@ozlabs.org
S: Maintained
FILE LOCKING (flock() and fcntl()/lockf())
P: Matthew Wilcox
M: matthew@wil.cx
@ -1374,7 +1434,7 @@ M: hch@infradead.org
W: ftp://ftp.openlinux.org/pub/people/hch/vxfs
S: Maintained
FUJITSU FR-V PORT
FUJITSU FR-V (FRV) PORT
P: David Howells
M: dhowells@redhat.com
S: Maintained
@ -1474,6 +1534,13 @@ HID CORE LAYER
P: Jiri Kosina
M: jkosina@suse.cz
L: linux-input@atrey.karlin.mff.cuni.cz
T: git kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jikos/hid.git
S: Maintained
HIGH-RESOLUTION TIMERS, CLOCKEVENTS, DYNTICKS
P: Thomas Gleixner
M: tglx@linutronix.de
L: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
S: Maintained
HIGH-SPEED SCC DRIVER FOR AX.25
@ -1515,8 +1582,9 @@ S: Supported
HOST AP DRIVER
P: Jouni Malinen
M: jkmaline@cc.hut.fi
L: hostap@shmoo.com
M: j@w1.fi
L: hostap@shmoo.com (subscribers-only)
L: linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
W: http://hostap.epitest.fi/
S: Maintained
@ -1563,12 +1631,6 @@ L: i2c@lm-sensors.org
T: quilt http://khali.linux-fr.org/devel/linux-2.6/jdelvare-i2c/
S: Maintained
I2O
P: Markus Lidel
M: markus.lidel@shadowconnect.com
W: http://i2o.shadowconnect.com/
S: Maintained
i386 BOOT CODE
P: Riley H. Williams
M: Riley@Williams.Name
@ -1596,15 +1658,6 @@ W: http://www.ia64-linux.org/
T: git kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/aegl/linux-2.6.git
S: Maintained
IBM ACPI EXTRAS DRIVER
P: Henrique de Moraes Holschuh
M: ibm-acpi@hmh.eng.br
L: ibm-acpi-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
W: http://ibm-acpi.sourceforge.net
W: http://thinkwiki.org/wiki/Ibm-acpi
T: git repo.or.cz/linux-2.6/linux-acpi-2.6/ibm-acpi-2.6.git
S: Maintained
SN-IA64 (Itanium) SUB-PLATFORM
P: Jes Sorensen
M: jes@sgi.com
@ -1659,7 +1712,7 @@ S: Maintained
IEEE 1394 SUBSYSTEM
P: Ben Collins
M: bcollins@debian.org
M: ben.collins@ubuntu.com
P: Stefan Richter
M: stefanr@s5r6.in-berlin.de
L: linux1394-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
@ -1667,25 +1720,11 @@ W: http://www.linux1394.org/
T: git kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/ieee1394/linux1394-2.6.git
S: Maintained
IEEE 1394 IPV4 DRIVER (eth1394)
P: Stefan Richter
M: stefanr@s5r6.in-berlin.de
L: linux1394-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
S: Odd Fixes
IEEE 1394 PCILYNX DRIVER
P: Jody McIntyre
M: scjody@modernduck.com
P: Stefan Richter
M: stefanr@s5r6.in-berlin.de
L: linux1394-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
S: Odd Fixes
IEEE 1394 RAW I/O DRIVER
P: Ben Collins
M: bcollins@debian.org
IEEE 1394 RAW I/O DRIVER (raw1394)
P: Dan Dennedy
M: dan@dennedy.org
P: Stefan Richter
M: stefanr@s5r6.in-berlin.de
L: linux1394-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
S: Maintained
@ -1732,7 +1771,7 @@ S: Maintained
INTEL 810/815 FRAMEBUFFER DRIVER
P: Antonino Daplas
M: adaplas@pol.net
M: adaplas@gmail.com
L: linux-fbdev-devel@lists.sourceforge.net (subscribers-only)
S: Maintained
@ -1772,6 +1811,7 @@ P: Jeff Kirsher
M: jeffrey.t.kirsher@intel.com
P: Auke Kok
M: auke-jan.h.kok@intel.com
L: e1000-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
W: http://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000/
S: Supported
@ -1786,6 +1826,7 @@ P: Jeff Kirsher
M: jeffrey.t.kirsher@intel.com
P: Auke Kok
M: auke-jan.h.kok@intel.com
L: e1000-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
W: http://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000/
S: Supported
@ -1800,6 +1841,7 @@ P: Jesse Brandeburg
M: jesse.brandeburg@intel.com
P: Auke Kok
M: auke-jan.h.kok@intel.com
L: e1000-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
W: http://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000/
S: Supported
@ -1808,6 +1850,7 @@ P: Yi Zhu
M: yi.zhu@intel.com
P: James Ketrenos
M: jketreno@linux.intel.com
L: linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
L: ipw2100-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
L: http://lists.sourceforge.net/mailman/listinfo/ipw2100-devel
W: http://ipw2100.sourceforge.net
@ -1818,6 +1861,7 @@ P: Yi Zhu
M: yi.zhu@intel.com
P: James Ketrenos
M: jketreno@linux.intel.com
L: linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
L: ipw2100-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
L: http://lists.sourceforge.net/mailman/listinfo/ipw2100-devel
W: http://ipw2200.sourceforge.net
@ -1849,7 +1893,7 @@ S: Supported
IPX NETWORK LAYER
P: Arnaldo Carvalho de Melo
M: acme@conectiva.com.br
M: acme@ghostprotocols.net
L: netdev@vger.kernel.org
S: Maintained
@ -1882,13 +1926,6 @@ L: isdn4linux@listserv.isdn4linux.de
W: http://www.melware.de
S: Maintained
JOURNALLING FLASH FILE SYSTEM (JFFS)
P: Axis Communications AB
M: jffs-dev@axis.com
L: jffs-dev@axis.com
W: http://www.developer.axis.com/software/jffs/
S: Maintained
JOURNALLING FLASH FILE SYSTEM V2 (JFFS2)
P: David Woodhouse
M: dwmw2@infradead.org
@ -1906,7 +1943,7 @@ S: Supported
JOURNALLING LAYER FOR BLOCK DEVICES (JBD)
P: Stephen Tweedie, Andrew Morton
M: sct@redhat.com, akpm@osdl.org
M: sct@redhat.com, akpm@linux-foundation.org
L: linux-ext4@vger.kernel.org
S: Maintained
@ -1927,7 +1964,7 @@ P: Vivek Goyal
M: vgoyal@in.ibm.com
P: Haren Myneni
M: hbabu@us.ibm.com
L: fastboot@lists.osdl.org
L: fastboot@lists.linux-foundation.org
L: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
W: http://lse.sourceforge.net/kdump/
S: Maintained
@ -1954,7 +1991,7 @@ S: Maintained
KERNEL JANITORS
P: Several
L: kernel-janitors@lists.osdl.org
L: kernel-janitors@lists.linux-foundation.org
W: http://www.kerneljanitors.org/
S: Maintained
@ -1977,7 +2014,7 @@ P: Eric Biederman
M: ebiederm@xmission.com
W: http://www.xmission.com/~ebiederm/files/kexec/
L: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
L: fastboot@osdl.org
L: fastboot@lists.linux-foundation.org
S: Maintained
KPROBES
@ -2093,7 +2130,7 @@ S: Supported
LLC (802.2)
P: Arnaldo Carvalho de Melo
M: acme@conectiva.com.br
M: acme@ghostprotocols.net
S: Maintained
LINUX FOR 64BIT POWERPC
@ -2221,6 +2258,14 @@ L: linux-mtd@lists.infradead.org
T: git git://git.infradead.org/mtd-2.6.git
S: Maintained
UNSORTED BLOCK IMAGES (UBI)
P: Artem Bityutskiy
M: dedekind@infradead.org
W: http://www.linux-mtd.infradead.org/
L: linux-mtd@lists.infradead.org
T: git git://git.infradead.org/ubi-2.6.git
S: Maintained
MICROTEK X6 SCANNER
P: Oliver Neukum
M: oliver@neukum.name
@ -2315,7 +2360,7 @@ S: Maintained
NETEM NETWORK EMULATOR
P: Stephen Hemminger
M: shemminger@linux-foundation.org
L: netem@osdl.org
L: netem@lists.linux-foundation.org
S: Maintained
NETFILTER/IPTABLES/IPCHAINS
@ -2354,7 +2399,7 @@ S: Maintained
NETWORK DEVICE DRIVERS
P: Andrew Morton
M: akpm@osdl.org
M: akpm@linux-foundation.org
P: Jeff Garzik
M: jgarzik@pobox.com
L: netdev@vger.kernel.org
@ -2454,10 +2499,23 @@ S: Maintained
NVIDIA (rivafb and nvidiafb) FRAMEBUFFER DRIVER
P: Antonino Daplas
M: adaplas@pol.net
M: adaplas@gmail.com
L: linux-fbdev-devel@lists.sourceforge.net (subscribers-only)
S: Maintained
NETERION (S2IO) Xframe 10GbE DRIVER
P: Ramkrishna Vepa
M: ram.vepa@neterion.com
P: Rastapur Santosh
M: santosh.rastapur@neterion.com
P: Sivakumar Subramani
M: sivakumar.subramani@neterion.com
P: Sreenivasa Honnur
M: sreenivasa.honnur@neterion.com
L: netdev@vger.kernel.org
W: http://trac.neterion.com/cgi-bin/trac.cgi/wiki/TitleIndex?anonymous
S: Supported
OPENCORES I2C BUS DRIVER
P: Peter Korsgaard
M: jacmet@sunsite.dk
@ -2493,6 +2551,12 @@ P: Harald Welte
M: laforge@gnumonks.org
S: Maintained
OMNIVISION OV7670 SENSOR DRIVER
P: Jonathan Corbet
M: corbet@lwn.net
L: video4linux-list@redhat.com
S: Maintained
ONSTREAM SCSI TAPE DRIVER
P: Willem Riede
M: osst@riede.org
@ -2517,6 +2581,7 @@ P: Pavel Roskin
M: proski@gnu.org
P: David Gibson
M: hermes@gibson.dropbear.id.au
L: linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
L: orinoco-users@lists.sourceforge.net
L: orinoco-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
W: http://www.nongnu.org/orinoco/
@ -2535,16 +2600,8 @@ L: i2c@lm-sensors.org
S: Maintained
PARALLEL PORT SUPPORT
P: Phil Blundell
M: philb@gnu.org
P: Tim Waugh
M: tim@cyberelk.net
P: David Campbell
P: Andrea Arcangeli
M: andrea@suse.de
L: linux-parport@lists.infradead.org
W: http://people.redhat.com/twaugh/parport/
S: Maintained
S: Orphan
PARIDE DRIVERS FOR PARALLEL PORT IDE DEVICES
P: Tim Waugh
@ -2623,8 +2680,8 @@ T: git kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/brodo/pcmcia-2.6.git
S: Maintained
PCNET32 NETWORK DRIVER
P: Thomas Bogendörfer
M: tsbogend@alpha.franken.de
P: Don Fry
M: pcnet32@verizon.net
L: netdev@vger.kernel.org
S: Maintained
@ -2704,7 +2761,7 @@ S: Supported
PRISM54 WIRELESS DRIVER
P: Prism54 Development Team
M: developers@islsm.org
L: netdev@vger.kernel.org
L: linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
W: http://prism54.org
S: Maintained
@ -2730,7 +2787,7 @@ S: Supported
PVRUSB2 VIDEO4LINUX DRIVER
P: Mike Isely
M: isely@pobox.com
L: pvrusb2@isely.net
L: pvrusb2@isely.net (subscribers-only)
L: video4linux-list@redhat.com
W: http://www.isely.net/pvrusb2/
S: Maintained
@ -2775,7 +2832,7 @@ S: Maintained
RAYLINK/WEBGEAR 802.11 WIRELESS LAN DRIVER
P: Corey Thomas
M: corey@world.std.com
L: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
L: linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
S: Maintained
RANDOM NUMBER DRIVER
@ -2838,7 +2895,7 @@ S: Orphan
S3 SAVAGE FRAMEBUFFER DRIVER
P: Antonino Daplas
M: adaplas@pol.net
M: adaplas@gmail.com
L: linux-fbdev-devel@lists.sourceforge.net (subscribers-only)
S: Maintained
@ -2921,9 +2978,12 @@ L: linux-scsi@vger.kernel.org
S: Maintained
SCTP PROTOCOL
P: Vlad Yasevich
M: vladislav.yasevich@hp.com
P: Sridhar Samudrala
M: sri@us.ibm.com
L: lksctp-developers@lists.sourceforge.net
W: http://lksctp.sourceforge.net
S: Supported
SCx200 CPU SUPPORT
@ -2951,8 +3011,10 @@ P: Stephen Smalley
M: sds@tycho.nsa.gov
P: James Morris
M: jmorris@namei.org
P: Eric Paris
M: eparis@parisplace.org
L: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org (kernel issues)
L: selinux@tycho.nsa.gov (general discussion)
L: selinux@tycho.nsa.gov (subscribers-only, general discussion)
W: http://www.nsa.gov/selinux
S: Supported
@ -3035,7 +3097,7 @@ M: josejx@gentoo.org
P: Daniel Drake
M: dsd@gentoo.org
W: http://softmac.sipsolutions.net/
L: netdev@vger.kernel.org
L: linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
S: Maintained
SOFTWARE RAID (Multiple Disks) SUPPORT
@ -3049,7 +3111,7 @@ S: Supported
SOFTWARE SUSPEND:
P: Pavel Machek
M: pavel@suse.cz
L: linux-pm@osdl.org
L: linux-pm@lists.linux-foundation.org
S: Maintained
SONIC NETWORK DRIVER
@ -3059,9 +3121,10 @@ L: netdev@vger.kernel.org
S: Maintained
SONY VAIO CONTROL DEVICE DRIVER
P: Stelian Pop
M: stelian@popies.net
W: http://popies.net/sonypi/
P: Mattia Dongili
M: malattia@linux.it
L: linux-acpi@vger.kernel.org
W: http://www.linux.it/~malattia/wiki/index.php/Sony_drivers
S: Maintained
SOUND
@ -3094,6 +3157,9 @@ TPM DEVICE DRIVER
P: Kylene Hall
M: kjhall@us.ibm.com
W: http://tpmdd.sourceforge.net
P: Marcel Selhorst
M: tpm@selhorst.net
W: http://www.prosec.rub.de/tpm/
L: tpmdd-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
S: Maintained
@ -3107,6 +3173,15 @@ P: Chris Zankel
M: chris@zankel.net
S: Maintained
THINKPAD ACPI EXTRAS DRIVER
P: Henrique de Moraes Holschuh
M: ibm-acpi@hmh.eng.br
L: ibm-acpi-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
W: http://ibm-acpi.sourceforge.net
W: http://thinkwiki.org/wiki/Ibm-acpi
T: git repo.or.cz/linux-2.6/linux-acpi-2.6/ibm-acpi-2.6.git
S: Maintained
UltraSPARC (sparc64):
P: David S. Miller
M: davem@davemloft.net
@ -3158,8 +3233,8 @@ L: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org ?
S: Supported
SPIDERNET NETWORK DRIVER for CELL
P: Jim Lewis
M: jim@jklewis.com
P: Linas Vepstas
M: linas@austin.ibm.com
L: netdev@vger.kernel.org
S: Supported
@ -3372,6 +3447,13 @@ L: linux-usb-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
S: Maintained
W: http://www.kroah.com/linux-usb/
USB DAVICOM DM9601 DRIVER
P: Peter Korsgaard
M: jacmet@sunsite.dk
L: linux-usb-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
W: http://www.linux-usb.org/usbnet
S: Maintained
USB EHCI DRIVER
P: David Brownell
M: dbrownell@users.sourceforge.net
@ -3397,6 +3479,7 @@ USB HID/HIDBP DRIVERS
P: Jiri Kosina
M: jkosina@suse.cz
L: linux-usb-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
T: git kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jikos/hid.git
S: Maintained
USB HUB DRIVER
@ -3551,7 +3634,7 @@ L: linux-usb-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
W: http://www.connecttech.com
S: Supported
USB SN9C10x DRIVER
USB SN9C1xx DRIVER
P: Luca Risolia
M: luca.risolia@studio.unibo.it
L: linux-usb-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
@ -3606,6 +3689,14 @@ L: linux-usb-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
W: http://linux-lc100020.sourceforge.net
S: Maintained
USB ZR364XX DRIVER
P: Antoine Jacquet
M: royale@zerezo.com
L: linux-usb-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
L: video4linux-list@redhat.com
W: http://royale.zerezo.com/zr364xx/
S: Maintained
USER-MODE LINUX
P: Jeff Dike
M: jdike@karaya.com
@ -3728,6 +3819,7 @@ S: Maintained
WAVELAN NETWORK DRIVER & WIRELESS EXTENSIONS
P: Jean Tourrilhes
M: jt@hpl.hp.com
L: linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
W: http://www.hpl.hp.com/personal/Jean_Tourrilhes/Linux/
S: Maintained
@ -3744,8 +3836,9 @@ S: Maintained
WL3501 WIRELESS PCMCIA CARD DRIVER
P: Arnaldo Carvalho de Melo
M: acme@conectiva.com.br
W: http://advogato.org/person/acme
M: acme@ghostprotocols.net
L: linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
W: http://oops.ghostprotocols.net:81/blog
S: Maintained
X.25 NETWORK LAYER
@ -3808,6 +3901,7 @@ M: dsd@gentoo.org
P: Ulrich Kunitz
M: kune@deine-taler.de
W: http://zd1211.ath.cx/wiki/DriverRewrite
L: linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
L: zd1211-devs@lists.sourceforge.net (subscribers-only)
S: Maintained

4
Makefile
View File

@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
VERSION = 2
PATCHLEVEL = 6
SUBLEVEL = 20
SUBLEVEL = 21
EXTRAVERSION =
NAME = Homicidal Dwarf Hamster
NAME = Nocturnal Monster Puppy
# *DOCUMENTATION*
# To see a list of typical targets execute "make help"

2
README
View File

@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ ON WHAT HARDWARE DOES IT RUN?
today Linux also runs on (at least) the Compaq Alpha AXP, Sun SPARC and
UltraSPARC, Motorola 68000, PowerPC, PowerPC64, ARM, Hitachi SuperH, Cell,
IBM S/390, MIPS, HP PA-RISC, Intel IA-64, DEC VAX, AMD x86-64, AXIS CRIS,
Cris, Xtensa, AVR32 and Renesas M32R architectures.
Xtensa, AVR32 and Renesas M32R architectures.
Linux is easily portable to most general-purpose 32- or 64-bit architectures
as long as they have a paged memory management unit (PMMU) and a port of the

2
arch/alpha/kernel/core_mcpcia.c
View File

@ -40,8 +40,6 @@
# define DBG_CFG(args)
#endif
#define MCPCIA_MAX_HOSES 4
/*
* Given a bus, device, and function number, compute resulting
* configuration space address and setup the MCPCIA_HAXR2 register

1
arch/alpha/kernel/err_titan.c
View File

@ -16,6 +16,7 @@
#include <asm/smp.h>
#include <asm/err_common.h>
#include <asm/err_ev6.h>
#include <asm/irq_regs.h>
#include "err_impl.h"
#include "proto.h"

8
arch/alpha/kernel/module.c
View File

@ -285,12 +285,12 @@ apply_relocate_add(Elf64_Shdr *sechdrs, const char *strtab,
reloc_overflow:
if (ELF64_ST_TYPE (sym->st_info) == STT_SECTION)
printk(KERN_ERR
"module %s: Relocation overflow vs section %d\n",
me->name, sym->st_shndx);
"module %s: Relocation (type %lu) overflow vs section %d\n",
me->name, r_type, sym->st_shndx);
else
printk(KERN_ERR
"module %s: Relocation overflow vs %s\n",
me->name, strtab + sym->st_name);
"module %s: Relocation (type %lu) overflow vs %s\n",
me->name, r_type, strtab + sym->st_name);
return -ENOEXEC;
}
}

6
arch/alpha/kernel/sys_nautilus.c
View File

@ -70,6 +70,12 @@ nautilus_map_irq(struct pci_dev *dev, u8 slot, u8 pin)
/* Preserve the IRQ set up by the console. */
u8 irq;
/* UP1500: AGP INTA is actually routed to IRQ 5, not IRQ 10 as
console reports. Check the device id of AGP bridge to distinguish
UP1500 from UP1000/1100. Note: 'pin' is 2 due to bridge swizzle. */
if (slot == 1 && pin == 2 &&
dev->bus->self && dev->bus->self->device == 0x700f)
return 5;
pci_read_config_byte(dev, PCI_INTERRUPT_LINE, &irq);
return irq;
}

9
arch/alpha/kernel/sys_noritake.c
View File

@ -66,6 +66,13 @@ noritake_startup_irq(unsigned int irq)
return 0;
}
static void
noritake_end_irq(unsigned int irq)
{
if (!(irq_desc[irq].status & (IRQ_DISABLED|IRQ_INPROGRESS)))
noritake_enable_irq(irq);
}
static struct hw_interrupt_type noritake_irq_type = {
.typename = "NORITAKE",
.startup = noritake_startup_irq,
@ -73,7 +80,7 @@ static struct hw_interrupt_type noritake_irq_type = {
.enable = noritake_enable_irq,
.disable = noritake_disable_irq,
.ack = noritake_disable_irq,
.end = noritake_enable_irq,
.end = noritake_end_irq,
};
static void

15
arch/alpha/kernel/sys_rawhide.c
View File

@ -52,6 +52,9 @@ rawhide_update_irq_hw(int hose, int mask)
*(vuip)MCPCIA_INT_MASK0(MCPCIA_HOSE2MID(hose));
}
#define hose_exists(h) \
(((h) < MCPCIA_MAX_HOSES) && (cached_irq_masks[(h)] != 0))
static inline void
rawhide_enable_irq(unsigned int irq)
{
@ -59,6 +62,9 @@ rawhide_enable_irq(unsigned int irq)
irq -= 16;
hose = irq / 24;
if (!hose_exists(hose)) /* if hose non-existent, exit */
return;
irq -= hose * 24;
mask = 1 << irq;
@ -76,6 +82,9 @@ rawhide_disable_irq(unsigned int irq)
irq -= 16;
hose = irq / 24;
if (!hose_exists(hose)) /* if hose non-existent, exit */
return;
irq -= hose * 24;
mask = ~(1 << irq) | hose_irq_masks[hose];
@ -93,6 +102,9 @@ rawhide_mask_and_ack_irq(unsigned int irq)
irq -= 16;
hose = irq / 24;
if (!hose_exists(hose)) /* if hose non-existent, exit */
return;
irq -= hose * 24;
mask1 = 1 << irq;
mask = ~mask1 | hose_irq_masks[hose];
@ -169,6 +181,9 @@ rawhide_init_irq(void)
mcpcia_init_hoses();
/* Clear them all; only hoses that exist will be non-zero. */
for (i = 0; i < MCPCIA_MAX_HOSES; i++) cached_irq_masks[i] = 0;
for (hose = hose_head; hose; hose = hose->next) {
unsigned int h = hose->index;
unsigned int mask = hose_irq_masks[h];

14
arch/alpha/kernel/sys_sio.c
View File

@ -84,12 +84,16 @@ alphabook1_init_arch(void)
static void __init
sio_pci_route(void)
{
#if defined(ALPHA_RESTORE_SRM_SETUP)
/* First, read and save the original setting. */
unsigned int orig_route_tab;
/* First, ALWAYS read and print the original setting. */
pci_bus_read_config_dword(pci_isa_hose->bus, PCI_DEVFN(7, 0), 0x60,
&saved_config.orig_route_tab);
&orig_route_tab);
printk("%s: PIRQ original 0x%x new 0x%x\n", __FUNCTION__,
saved_config.orig_route_tab, alpha_mv.sys.sio.route_tab);
orig_route_tab, alpha_mv.sys.sio.route_tab);
#if defined(ALPHA_RESTORE_SRM_SETUP)
saved_config.orig_route_tab = orig_route_tab;
#endif
/* Now override with desired setting. */
@ -334,7 +338,7 @@ struct alpha_machine_vector avanti_mv __initmv = {
.pci_swizzle = common_swizzle,
.sys = { .sio = {
.route_tab = 0x0b0a0e0f,
.route_tab = 0x0b0a050f, /* leave 14 for IDE, 9 for SND */
}}
};
ALIAS_MV(avanti)

2
arch/alpha/kernel/sys_sx164.c
View File

@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ sx164_init_arch(void)
if (amask(AMASK_MAX) != 0
&& alpha_using_srm
&& (cpu->pal_revision & 0xffff) == 0x117) {
&& (cpu->pal_revision & 0xffff) <= 0x117) {
__asm__ __volatile__(
"lda $16,8($31)\n"
"call_pal 9\n" /* Allow PALRES insns in kernel mode */

3
arch/alpha/kernel/sys_titan.c
View File

@ -257,8 +257,7 @@ titan_dispatch_irqs(u64 mask)
*/
while (mask) {
/* convert to SRM vector... priority is <63> -> <0> */
__asm__("ctlz %1, %0" : "=r"(vector) : "r"(mask));
vector = 63 - vector;
vector = 63 - __kernel_ctlz(mask);
mask &= ~(1UL << vector); /* clear it out */
vector = 0x900 + (vector << 4); /* convert to SRM vector */

1
arch/alpha/lib/Makefile
View File

@ -36,7 +36,6 @@ lib-y = __divqu.o __remqu.o __divlu.o __remlu.o \
$(ev6-y)csum_ipv6_magic.o \
$(ev6-y)clear_page.o \
$(ev6-y)copy_page.o \
strcasecmp.o \
fpreg.o \
callback_srm.o srm_puts.o srm_printk.o

26
arch/alpha/lib/strcasecmp.c
View File

@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
/*
* linux/arch/alpha/lib/strcasecmp.c
*/
#include <linux/string.h>
/* We handle nothing here except the C locale. Since this is used in
only one place, on strings known to contain only 7 bit ASCII, this
is ok. */
int strcasecmp(const char *a, const char *b)
{
int ca, cb;
do {
ca = *a++ & 0xff;
cb = *b++ & 0xff;
if (ca >= 'A' && ca <= 'Z')
ca += 'a' - 'A';
if (cb >= 'A' && cb <= 'Z')
cb += 'a' - 'A';
} while (ca == cb && ca != '\0');
return ca - cb;
}

53
arch/arm/Kconfig
View File

@ -21,6 +21,10 @@ config ARM
config SYS_SUPPORTS_APM_EMULATION
bool
config GENERIC_GPIO
bool
default n
config GENERIC_TIME
bool
default n
@ -163,6 +167,7 @@ config ARCH_VERSATILE
config ARCH_AT91
bool "Atmel AT91"
select GENERIC_GPIO
help
This enables support for systems based on the Atmel AT91RM9200
and AT91SAM9xxx processors.
@ -171,6 +176,7 @@ config ARCH_CLPS7500
bool "Cirrus CL-PS7500FE"
select TIMER_ACORN
select ISA
select NO_IOPORT
help
Support for the Cirrus Logic PS7500FE system-on-a-chip.
@ -189,6 +195,7 @@ config ARCH_CO285
config ARCH_EBSA110
bool "EBSA-110"
select ISA
select NO_IOPORT
help
This is an evaluation board for the StrongARM processor available
from Digital. It has limited hardware on-board, including an
@ -245,6 +252,8 @@ config ARCH_IOP33X
config ARCH_IOP13XX
bool "IOP13xx-based"
depends on MMU
select PLAT_IOP
select PCI
help
Support for Intel's IOP13XX (XScale) family of processors.
@ -283,6 +292,14 @@ config ARCH_L7200
If you have any questions or comments about the Linux kernel port
to this board, send e-mail to <sjhill@cotw.com>.
config ARCH_NS9XXX
bool "NetSilicon NS9xxx"
help
Say Y here if you intend to run this kernel on a NetSilicon NS9xxx
System.
<http://www.digi.com/products/microprocessors/index.jsp>
config ARCH_PNX4008
bool "Philips Nexperia PNX4008 Mobile"
help
@ -292,6 +309,8 @@ config ARCH_PXA
bool "PXA2xx-based"
depends on MMU
select ARCH_MTD_XIP
select GENERIC_GPIO
select GENERIC_TIME
help
Support for Intel's PXA2XX processor line.
@ -312,11 +331,13 @@ config ARCH_SA1100
select ISA
select ARCH_DISCONTIGMEM_ENABLE
select ARCH_MTD_XIP
select GENERIC_GPIO
help
Support for StrongARM 11x0 based boards.
config ARCH_S3C2410
bool "Samsung S3C2410, S3C2412, S3C2413, S3C2440, S3C2442"
bool "Samsung S3C2410, S3C2412, S3C2413, S3C2440, S3C2442, S3C2443"
select GENERIC_GPIO
help
Samsung S3C2410X CPU based systems, such as the Simtec Electronics
BAST (<http://www.simtec.co.uk/products/EB110ITX/>), the IPAQ 1940 or
@ -341,6 +362,7 @@ config ARCH_LH7A40X
config ARCH_OMAP
bool "TI OMAP"
select GENERIC_GPIO
help
Support for TI's OMAP platform (OMAP1 and OMAP2).
@ -376,7 +398,16 @@ source "arch/arm/mach-omap1/Kconfig"
source "arch/arm/mach-omap2/Kconfig"
source "arch/arm/plat-s3c24xx/Kconfig"
if ARCH_S3C2410
source "arch/arm/mach-s3c2400/Kconfig"
source "arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/Kconfig"
source "arch/arm/mach-s3c2412/Kconfig"
source "arch/arm/mach-s3c2440/Kconfig"
source "arch/arm/mach-s3c2442/Kconfig"
source "arch/arm/mach-s3c2443/Kconfig"
endif
source "arch/arm/mach-lh7a40x/Kconfig"
@ -390,10 +421,12 @@ source "arch/arm/mach-aaec2000/Kconfig"
source "arch/arm/mach-realview/Kconfig"
source "arch/arm/mach-at91rm9200/Kconfig"
source "arch/arm/mach-at91/Kconfig"
source "arch/arm/mach-netx/Kconfig"
source "arch/arm/mach-ns9xxx/Kconfig"
# Definitions to make life easier
config ARCH_ACORN
bool
@ -405,7 +438,7 @@ source arch/arm/mm/Kconfig
config IWMMXT
bool "Enable iWMMXt support"
depends CPU_XSCALE || CPU_XSC3
depends on CPU_XSCALE || CPU_XSC3
default y if PXA27x
help
Enable support for iWMMXt context switching at run time if
@ -751,6 +784,20 @@ config XIP_PHYS_ADDR
be linked for and stored to. This address is dependent on your
own flash usage.
config KEXEC
bool "Kexec system call (EXPERIMENTAL)"
depends on EXPERIMENTAL
help
kexec is a system call that implements the ability to shutdown your
current kernel, and to start another kernel. It is like a reboot
but it is indepedent of the system firmware. And like a reboot
you can start any kernel with it, not just Linux.
It is an ongoing process to be certain the hardware in a machine
is properly shutdown, so do not be surprised if this code does not
initially work for you. It may help to enable device hotplugging
support.
endmenu
if (ARCH_SA1100 || ARCH_INTEGRATOR || ARCH_OMAP || ARCH_IMX )

10
arch/arm/Makefile
View File

@ -124,10 +124,12 @@ endif
machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_H720X) := h720x
machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_AAEC2000) := aaec2000
machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_REALVIEW) := realview
machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_AT91) := at91rm9200
machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_AT91) := at91
machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_EP93XX) := ep93xx
machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_PNX4008) := pnx4008
machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_NETX) := netx
machine-$(CONFIG_ARCH_NS9XXX) := ns9xxx
textofs-$(CONFIG_ARCH_NS9XXX) := 0x00108000
ifeq ($(CONFIG_ARCH_EBSA110),y)
# This is what happens if you forget the IOCS16 line.
@ -161,6 +163,11 @@ endif
# If we have a machine-specific directory, then include it in the build.
core-y += arch/arm/kernel/ arch/arm/mm/ arch/arm/common/
core-y += $(MACHINE)
core-$(CONFIG_ARCH_S3C2410) += arch/arm/mach-s3c2400/
core-$(CONFIG_ARCH_S3C2410) += arch/arm/mach-s3c2412/
core-$(CONFIG_ARCH_S3C2410) += arch/arm/mach-s3c2440/
core-$(CONFIG_ARCH_S3C2410) += arch/arm/mach-s3c2442/
core-$(CONFIG_ARCH_S3C2410) += arch/arm/mach-s3c2443/
core-$(CONFIG_FPE_NWFPE) += arch/arm/nwfpe/
core-$(CONFIG_FPE_FASTFPE) += $(FASTFPE_OBJ)
core-$(CONFIG_VFP) += arch/arm/vfp/
@ -168,6 +175,7 @@ core-$(CONFIG_VFP) += arch/arm/vfp/
# If we have a common platform directory, then include it in the build.
core-$(CONFIG_PLAT_IOP) += arch/arm/plat-iop/
core-$(CONFIG_ARCH_OMAP) += arch/arm/plat-omap/
core-$(CONFIG_PLAT_S3C24XX) += arch/arm/plat-s3c24xx/
drivers-$(CONFIG_OPROFILE) += arch/arm/oprofile/
drivers-$(CONFIG_ARCH_CLPS7500) += drivers/acorn/char/

2
arch/arm/boot/.gitignore vendored Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
Image
zImage

1
arch/arm/boot/compressed/.gitignore vendored Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1 @@
piggy.gz

1
arch/arm/common/Kconfig
View File

@ -28,6 +28,7 @@ config SHARP_PARAM
config SHARPSL_PM
bool
select APM_EMULATION
config SHARP_SCOOP
bool

87
arch/arm/common/dmabounce.c
View File

@ -32,7 +32,6 @@
#include <asm/cacheflush.h>
#undef DEBUG
#undef STATS
#ifdef STATS
@ -66,14 +65,13 @@ struct dmabounce_pool {
};
struct dmabounce_device_info {
struct list_head node;
struct device *dev;
struct list_head safe_buffers;
#ifdef STATS
unsigned long total_allocs;
unsigned long map_op_count;
unsigned long bounce_count;
int attr_res;
#endif
struct dmabounce_pool small;
struct dmabounce_pool large;
@ -81,34 +79,24 @@ struct dmabounce_device_info {
rwlock_t lock;
};
static LIST_HEAD(dmabounce_devs);
#ifdef STATS
static void print_alloc_stats(struct dmabounce_device_info *device_info)
static ssize_t dmabounce_show(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
char *buf)
{
printk(KERN_INFO
"%s: dmabounce: sbp: %lu, lbp: %lu, other: %lu, total: %lu\n",
device_info->dev->bus_id,
device_info->small.allocs, device_info->large.allocs,
struct dmabounce_device_info *device_info = dev->archdata.dmabounce;
return sprintf(buf, "%lu %lu %lu %lu %lu %lu\n",
device_info->small.allocs,
device_info->large.allocs,
device_info->total_allocs - device_info->small.allocs -
device_info->large.allocs,
device_info->total_allocs);
device_info->total_allocs,
device_info->map_op_count,
device_info->bounce_count);
}
static DEVICE_ATTR(dmabounce_stats, 0400, dmabounce_show, NULL);
#endif
/* find the given device in the dmabounce device list */
static inline struct dmabounce_device_info *
find_dmabounce_dev(struct device *dev)
{
struct dmabounce_device_info *d;
list_for_each_entry(d, &dmabounce_devs, node)
if (d->dev == dev)
return d;
return NULL;
}
/* allocate a 'safe' buffer and keep track of it */
static inline struct safe_buffer *
@ -162,8 +150,6 @@ alloc_safe_buffer(struct dmabounce_device_info *device_info, void *ptr,
if (pool)
pool->allocs++;
device_info->total_allocs++;
if (device_info->total_allocs % 1000 == 0)
print_alloc_stats(device_info);
#endif
write_lock_irqsave(&device_info->lock, flags);
@ -218,20 +204,11 @@ free_safe_buffer(struct dmabounce_device_info *device_info, struct safe_buffer *
/* ************************************************** */
#ifdef STATS
static void print_map_stats(struct dmabounce_device_info *device_info)
{
dev_info(device_info->dev,
"dmabounce: map_op_count=%lu, bounce_count=%lu\n",
device_info->map_op_count, device_info->bounce_count);
}
#endif
static inline dma_addr_t
map_single(struct device *dev, void *ptr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction dir)
{
struct dmabounce_device_info *device_info = find_dmabounce_dev(dev);
struct dmabounce_device_info *device_info = dev->archdata.dmabounce;
dma_addr_t dma_addr;
int needs_bounce = 0;
@ -281,9 +258,13 @@ map_single(struct device *dev, void *ptr, size_t size,
ptr = buf->safe;
dma_addr = buf->safe_dma_addr;
}
} else {
/*
* We don't need to sync the DMA buffer since
* it was allocated via the coherent allocators.
*/
consistent_sync(ptr, size, dir);
}
return dma_addr;
}
@ -292,7 +273,7 @@ static inline void
unmap_single(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction dir)
{
struct dmabounce_device_info *device_info = find_dmabounce_dev(dev);
struct dmabounce_device_info *device_info = dev->archdata.dmabounce;
struct safe_buffer *buf = NULL;
/*
@ -317,12 +298,12 @@ unmap_single(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr, size_t size,
DO_STATS ( device_info->bounce_count++ );
if (dir == DMA_FROM_DEVICE || dir == DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL) {
unsigned long ptr;
void *ptr = buf->ptr;
dev_dbg(dev,
"%s: copy back safe %p to unsafe %p size %d\n",
__func__, buf->safe, buf->ptr, size);
memcpy(buf->ptr, buf->safe, size);
__func__, buf->safe, ptr, size);
memcpy(ptr, buf->safe, size);
/*
* DMA buffers must have the same cache properties
@ -332,8 +313,8 @@ unmap_single(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr, size_t size,
* bidirectional case because we know the cache
* lines will be coherent with the data written.
*/
ptr = (unsigned long)buf->ptr;
dmac_clean_range(ptr, ptr + size);
outer_clean_range(__pa(ptr), __pa(ptr) + size);
}
free_safe_buffer(device_info, buf);
}
@ -343,7 +324,7 @@ static inline void
sync_single(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction dir)
{
struct dmabounce_device_info *device_info = find_dmabounce_dev(dev);
struct dmabounce_device_info *device_info = dev->archdata.dmabounce;
struct safe_buffer *buf = NULL;
if (device_info)
@ -397,7 +378,10 @@ sync_single(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr, size_t size,
default:
BUG();
}
consistent_sync(buf->safe, size, dir);
/*
* No need to sync the safe buffer - it was allocated
* via the coherent allocators.
*/
} else {
consistent_sync(dma_to_virt(dev, dma_addr), size, dir);
}
@ -604,9 +588,10 @@ dmabounce_register_dev(struct device *dev, unsigned long small_buffer_size,
device_info->total_allocs = 0;
device_info->map_op_count = 0;
device_info->bounce_count = 0;
device_info->attr_res = device_create_file(dev, &dev_attr_dmabounce_stats);
#endif
list_add(&device_info->node, &dmabounce_devs);
dev->archdata.dmabounce = device_info;
printk(KERN_INFO "dmabounce: registered device %s on %s bus\n",
dev->bus_id, dev->bus->name);
@ -623,7 +608,9 @@ dmabounce_register_dev(struct device *dev, unsigned long small_buffer_size,
void
dmabounce_unregister_dev(struct device *dev)
{
struct dmabounce_device_info *device_info = find_dmabounce_dev(dev);
struct dmabounce_device_info *device_info = dev->archdata.dmabounce;
dev->archdata.dmabounce = NULL;
if (!device_info) {
printk(KERN_WARNING
@ -645,12 +632,10 @@ dmabounce_unregister_dev(struct device *dev)
dma_pool_destroy(device_info->large.pool);
#ifdef STATS
print_alloc_stats(device_info);
print_map_stats(device_info);
if (device_info->attr_res == 0)
device_remove_file(dev, &dev_attr_dmabounce_stats);
#endif
list_del(&device_info->node);
kfree(device_info);
printk(KERN_INFO "dmabounce: device %s on %s bus unregistered\n",

109
arch/arm/common/gic.c
View File

@ -14,7 +14,9 @@
*
* o There is one CPU Interface per CPU, which sends interrupts sent
* by the Distributor, and interrupts generated locally, to the
* associated CPU.
* associated CPU. The base address of the CPU interface is usually
* aliased so that the same address points to different chips depending
* on the CPU it is accessed from.
*
* Note that IRQs 0-31 are special - they are local to each CPU.
* As such, the enable set/clear, pending set/clear and active bit
@ -31,10 +33,38 @@
#include <asm/mach/irq.h>
#include <asm/hardware/gic.h>
static void __iomem *gic_dist_base;
static void __iomem *gic_cpu_base;
static DEFINE_SPINLOCK(irq_controller_lock);
struct gic_chip_data {
unsigned int irq_offset;
void __iomem *dist_base;
void __iomem *cpu_base;
};
#ifndef MAX_GIC_NR
#define MAX_GIC_NR 1
#endif
static struct gic_chip_data gic_data[MAX_GIC_NR];
static inline void __iomem *gic_dist_base(unsigned int irq)
{
struct gic_chip_data *gic_data = get_irq_chip_data(irq);
return gic_data->dist_base;
}
static inline void __iomem *gic_cpu_base(unsigned int irq)
{
struct gic_chip_data *gic_data = get_irq_chip_data(irq);
return gic_data->cpu_base;
}
static inline unsigned int gic_irq(unsigned int irq)
{
struct gic_chip_data *gic_data = get_irq_chip_data(irq);
return irq - gic_data->irq_offset;
}
/*
* Routines to acknowledge, disable and enable interrupts
*
@ -55,8 +85,8 @@ static void gic_ack_irq(unsigned int irq)
u32 mask = 1 << (irq % 32);
spin_lock(&irq_controller_lock);
writel(mask, gic_dist_base + GIC_DIST_ENABLE_CLEAR + (irq / 32) * 4);
writel(irq, gic_cpu_base + GIC_CPU_EOI);
writel(mask, gic_dist_base(irq) + GIC_DIST_ENABLE_CLEAR + (gic_irq(irq) / 32) * 4);
writel(gic_irq(irq), gic_cpu_base(irq) + GIC_CPU_EOI);
spin_unlock(&irq_controller_lock);
}
@ -65,7 +95,7 @@ static void gic_mask_irq(unsigned int irq)
u32 mask = 1 << (irq % 32);
spin_lock(&irq_controller_lock);
writel(mask, gic_dist_base + GIC_DIST_ENABLE_CLEAR + (irq / 32) * 4);
writel(mask, gic_dist_base(irq) + GIC_DIST_ENABLE_CLEAR + (gic_irq(irq) / 32) * 4);
spin_unlock(&irq_controller_lock);
}
@ -74,14 +104,14 @@ static void gic_unmask_irq(unsigned int irq)
u32 mask = 1 << (irq % 32);
spin_lock(&irq_controller_lock);
writel(mask, gic_dist_base + GIC_DIST_ENABLE_SET + (irq / 32) * 4);
writel(mask, gic_dist_base(irq) + GIC_DIST_ENABLE_SET + (gic_irq(irq) / 32) * 4);
spin_unlock(&irq_controller_lock);
}
#ifdef CONFIG_SMP
static void gic_set_cpu(unsigned int irq, cpumask_t mask_val)
{
void __iomem *reg = gic_dist_base + GIC_DIST_TARGET + (irq & ~3);
void __iomem *reg = gic_dist_base(irq) + GIC_DIST_TARGET + (gic_irq(irq) & ~3);
unsigned int shift = (irq % 4) * 8;
unsigned int cpu = first_cpu(mask_val);
u32 val;
@ -95,6 +125,37 @@ static void gic_set_cpu(unsigned int irq, cpumask_t mask_val)
}
#endif
static void fastcall gic_handle_cascade_irq(unsigned int irq,
struct irq_desc *desc)
{
struct gic_chip_data *chip_data = get_irq_data(irq);
struct irq_chip *chip = get_irq_chip(irq);
unsigned int cascade_irq;
unsigned long status;
/* primary controller ack'ing */
chip->ack(irq);
spin_lock(&irq_controller_lock);
status = readl(chip_data->cpu_base + GIC_CPU_INTACK);
spin_unlock(&irq_controller_lock);
cascade_irq = (status & 0x3ff);
if (cascade_irq > 1020)
goto out;
if (cascade_irq < 32 || cascade_irq >= NR_IRQS) {
do_bad_IRQ(cascade_irq, desc);
goto out;
}
cascade_irq += chip_data->irq_offset;
generic_handle_irq(cascade_irq);
out:
/* primary controller unmasking */
chip->unmask(irq);
}
static struct irq_chip gic_chip = {
.name = "GIC",
.ack = gic_ack_irq,
@ -105,15 +166,29 @@ static struct irq_chip gic_chip = {
#endif
};
void __init gic_dist_init(void __iomem *base)
void __init gic_cascade_irq(unsigned int gic_nr, unsigned int irq)
{
if (gic_nr >= MAX_GIC_NR)
BUG();
if (set_irq_data(irq, &gic_data[gic_nr]) != 0)
BUG();
set_irq_chained_handler(irq, gic_handle_cascade_irq);
}
void __init gic_dist_init(unsigned int gic_nr, void __iomem *base,
unsigned int irq_start)
{
unsigned int max_irq, i;
u32 cpumask = 1 << smp_processor_id();
if (gic_nr >= MAX_GIC_NR)
BUG();
cpumask |= cpumask << 8;
cpumask |= cpumask << 16;
gic_dist_base = base;
gic_data[gic_nr].dist_base = base;
gic_data[gic_nr].irq_offset = (irq_start - 1) & ~31;
writel(0, base + GIC_DIST_CTRL);
@ -158,8 +233,9 @@ void __init gic_dist_init(void __iomem *base)
/*
* Setup the Linux IRQ subsystem.
*/
for (i = 29; i < max_irq; i++) {
for (i = irq_start; i < gic_data[gic_nr].irq_offset + max_irq; i++) {
set_irq_chip(i, &gic_chip);
set_irq_chip_data(i, &gic_data[gic_nr]);
set_irq_handler(i, handle_level_irq);
set_irq_flags(i, IRQF_VALID | IRQF_PROBE);
}
@ -167,9 +243,13 @@ void __init gic_dist_init(void __iomem *base)
writel(1, base + GIC_DIST_CTRL);
}
void __cpuinit gic_cpu_init(void __iomem *base)
void __cpuinit gic_cpu_init(unsigned int gic_nr, void __iomem *base)
{
gic_cpu_base = base;
if (gic_nr >= MAX_GIC_NR)
BUG();
gic_data[gic_nr].cpu_base = base;
writel(0xf0, base + GIC_CPU_PRIMASK);
writel(1, base + GIC_CPU_CTRL);
}
@ -179,6 +259,7 @@ void gic_raise_softirq(cpumask_t cpumask, unsigned int irq)
{
unsigned long map = *cpus_addr(cpumask);
writel(map << 16 | irq, gic_dist_base + GIC_DIST_SOFTINT);
/* this always happens on GIC0 */
writel(map << 16 | irq, gic_data[0].dist_base + GIC_DIST_SOFTINT);
}
#endif

4
arch/arm/common/sharpsl_pm.c
View File

@ -23,11 +23,11 @@
#include <linux/interrupt.h>
#include <linux/platform_device.h>
#include <linux/leds.h>
#include <linux/apm-emulation.h>
#include <asm/hardware.h>
#include <asm/mach-types.h>
#include <asm/irq.h>
#include <asm/apm-emulation.h>
#include <asm/arch/pm.h>
#include <asm/arch/pxa-regs.h>
#include <asm/arch/sharpsl.h>
@ -766,10 +766,10 @@ static void sharpsl_apm_get_power_status(struct apm_power_info *info)
}
static struct pm_ops sharpsl_pm_ops = {
.pm_disk_mode = PM_DISK_FIRMWARE,
.prepare = pxa_pm_prepare,
.enter = corgi_pxa_pm_enter,
.finish = pxa_pm_finish,
.valid = pm_valid_only_mem,
};
static int __init sharpsl_pm_probe(struct platform_device *pdev)

Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More